You are on page 1of 307

Section 1 Module 1 Page 1

All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent


3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Do not delete this graphic elements in here:
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS Radio Network Planning
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
Section 1 Module 1 Page 2
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 2
Blank Page
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 Module 1 Page 3
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 3
Objectives
By the end of the course, participants know:
GPRS Session Management,
TBF Management,
Location Management,
System Information Management,
Cell Selection and Re-selection,
Power Control and RLC Measurements,
Coding Scheme and Link Adaptation,
Radio Resources Re-allocation,
(E)GPRS Planning Principles,
(E)GPRS Network Planning,
Network Evolution Scenarios,
(E)GPRS QoS Enhancement Features,
(E)GPRS with GSM Capacity Enhancement Features
Section 1 Module 1 Page 4
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 4
Objectives
Section 1 Module 1 Page 5
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 5
Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
Page
1 Basics 9
1.1 Service Overview GPRS 10
1.2 Service Overview EGPRS 11
1.3 Support of GPRS QoS classes 12
1.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 13
1.4 Dual Transfer Mode 14
1.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 15
1.5 (E)GPRS MS Multislot Classes 16
1.6 (E)GPRS General Architecture 17
1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture 19
1.8 (E)GPRS Protocol Layers (Transmission Plane) 22
1.9 Alcatel (E)GPRS BSS Hardware support 23
1.10 Modulation Technique: 8-PSK only for EGPRS 24
1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects 25
1.12 (E)GPRS Radio Blocks Structure 29
1.13 GPRS Channel Coding 31
1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding 34
1.15 Radio Link Adaptation Overview 39
1.16 Automatic ReQuest for repetition (ARQ) 40
1.17 Type-I ARQ mechanism 41
1.18 Type-I ARQ in GPRS 42
1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS 43
1.20 (E)GPRS radio physical channel: PDCH Concept 47
1.21 (E)GPRS Multiframe 48
1.22 (E)GPRS Logical Channels 49
1.23 Master/Slave PDCH concept 51
1.24 Temporary Block Flow 52
1.25 Resources Sharing 54
1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination 58
1.27 GPRS mobility management (GMM) states for MS 61
1.28 Radio Resource (RR) operating modes for MS 62
1.29 Attach procedure 63
1.30 PDP context activation 65
1.31 Location management 66
1.32 Routing Area 67
1.33 Network Mode of Operation (NMO) 68
1.34 TBF establishment 69
1.35 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 1 phase access 70
1.36 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 2 phases access 72
1.37 DL TBF establishment on CCCH 74
1.38 System information broadcasting on BCCH 75
1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH 77
1.40 (E)GPRS Transmission Aspects 80
1.40 TRX Classes Concept 81
1.41 Two Abis Links per BTS 84
2 B9 features 85
2.1 Enhanced Packet Cell Reselection (R4 MSs) 86
2.1.1 Radio Network Impact 87
2.2 Extended Uplink TBF Mode 88
2.2 Radio Network Planning Impact 89
2.3 Enhanced support of E-GPRS (EDGE) in uplink 91
2.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 93
2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9 94
2.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 98
2.5 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation 99
Section 1 Module 1 Page 6
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 6
Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!
Page
2.5.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 101
2.6 2G/3G Inter-working 102
2.6.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 105
2.7 M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing 106
2.7.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 108
2.8 Dynamic Abis allocation 109
2.8.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 110
2.9 Enhanced transmission resource management 111
2.10 RMS_I1 Improvements 112
2.10.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 113
2.11 RMS_I2 Improvements 114
2.11.1 Radio Network Planning Impact 115
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms 116
3.1 Cell Reselection Overview 117
3.2 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, no PBCCH established 121
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established 123
3.4 Cell reselection execution: NC0 in PTM 130
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode 132
3.6 GPRS redirection 143
3.7 GPRS Power Control: Overview 145
3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements 146
3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm 150
3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control 153
3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control 157
3.12 Link adaptation in EGPRS: New metrics 160
3.13 Link adaptation: DL EGPRS Radio Link Control 161
3.14 EGPRS Link Adaptation Decision 163
3.15 TRX ranking/TRX transmission pool set-up 164
3.16 TRX capability for PS traffic 166
3.17 Radio Resource Allocation: Overview 167
3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state 168
3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs 171
3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: EGPRS TBFs 176
3.21 Radio Resource Allocation: TBF Re-allocation 179
3.22 Radio Resource Allocation: Min_PDCH 180
3.23 Radio Resource Allocation: Fast initial (E)GPRS access 181
4 General (E)GPRS planning principels 182
4.1 Throughput Dependency -> Interference (and Level) 183
4.2 Packet data throughput 184
4.3 Reference performance point 185
4.4 Saturation effect 186
4.5 Cell area and throughput 188
4.6 Throughput <-> C/I 189
5 (E)GPRS Network intoduction 191
5.1 GPRS network planning 192
5.2 GPRS Greenfield planning 193
5.3 GPRS traffic calculation and traffic analysis 195
5.4 GPRS traffic calculationand PS traffic 196
5.5 GPRS traffic calculation and user profile 198
5.6 GPRS traffic calculation and market applications 199
5.7 GPRS traffic calculation and user behavior 200
5.8 Customer questionnaire 201
5.9 Traffic Model (Example) 203
5.10 User mapping 204
5.11 Multi-Service 205
Section 1 Module 1 Page 7
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 7
Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!
Page
5.12 QoS per User Application 206
5.13 GPRS traffic calculation 207
5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods 212
5.15 GPRS traffic calculation result 217
6 (E)GPRS Network design 218
6.1 General 219
6.2 Frequency planning 222
6.3 Throughput 224
6.4 Link budget 225
6.5 Interference analysis on BCCH frequencies 228
6.6 Interference analysis on TCH frequencies 229
6.7 TRX assignment to GPRS service 230
6.8 GPRS Analysis 231
6.9 LA and RA planning 235
6.10 Quality of Service 245
7 Considerabele features to react (E)GPRS target 248
7.1 General 249
7.1 Optimization campaign on parameters 250
7.2 MPDCH 251
7.3 Enhanced PDCH Adaptation & Fast pre-emption 254
7.4 User multiplexing 255
7.5 PDCH Resource Multiplexing 256
7.6 Radio (TBF) Resource Reallocation 257
7.7 Coding Scheme Adaptation 259
7.8 Cell Reselection 260
7.8 GPRS Power Control 262
7.8 Features on DL TBF establishment and release 263
7.8.1 Delayed DL TBF release 264
7.8.2 Fast Downlink TBF re-establishment process 266
7.8.3 Non-DRX feature 267
8 GPRS introduction into oerational GSM network 268
8.1 General 269
9 GSM Network enhancement features & GPRS 275
9.1 Frequency Hopping 276
9.2 -cell 278
9.3 Dual Band 280
9.4 Concentric cell 283
10 E-GPRS 284
10.1 E-GPRS main differences 285
11 GPRS traffic calculation example 288
11.1 Customer questionnaire (Example) 289
11.2 User and area distribution determination 291
11.3 Traffic demand for CS traffic 292
11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic 293
11.5 Network capacity calculation 297
11.6 Traffic dimensioning 301
Section 1 Module 1 Page 8
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 8
Blank Page
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 Module 1 Page 9
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 9
1 Basics
Section 1 Module 1 Page 10
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 10
1 Basics
1.1 Service Overview GPRS
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GPRS is a GSM feature
It has been introduced to provide end-to-end packet-switched (PS)
data transmission between MS users and fixed packet data networks
GPRS provides efficient utilization of the radio resources:
multislot operation
flexible sharing of radio resources between MS
resources are allocated only when data are transmitted
Charging is mainly based on data volume transmitted and not on the
connection time
Section 1 Module 1 Page 11
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 11
1 Basics
1.2 Service Overview EGPRS
EDGE Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution
ETSI standardized solution and can be introduced in two ways:
CS enhancement: Enhanced circuit-switched data or ECSD
PS enhancement for GPRS EGPRS
EGPRS relies on the introduction of 8-PSK (Eight Phase Shift Keying)
modulation technique:
Same qualities in terms of generating interference on an adjacent
channel as GMSK makes possible to integrate EDGE channels into
existing frequency plan
8-PSK Symbol rate = GMSK Symbol rate, but one symbol represents now 3
bits instead of 1 bit in GMSK increased data rates
Section 1 Module 1 Page 12
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 12
1 Basics
1.3 Support of GPRS QoS classes
Four QoS classes (or traffic classes) are defined:
The conversational class will be very likely dedicated to real-time
conversation. Speech and video conferencing tools are some
examples of such applications
The streaming class corresponds to a real-time stream and enforces
mainly constraints on jitter. Video streaming or PoC (Push to tak
over Celullar) are typical applications for the streaming traffic class.
The interactive class corresponds to mainly to traditional Internet
applications like web browsing. Some differentiation can be done
between two services by using the traffic handling priority attribute.
The background class is typically corresponding to Best Effort
services. Applications that make use of this class might be e-mail
downloading, SMS, or even ftp downloading.
PFC procedure
Packet Flow Context (PFC) is a concept introduced starting with R99 3GPP release to ensure that the
BSS is involved in the R99 QoS negotiation. The interest of PFC is to differentiate on the radio
interface the conversational and streaming traffics and to reserve resources for these traffics.
Without the PFC, the BSS only knows the R97/98 QoS parameters (correspond to the interactive and
background R99 QoS classes). It enables to perform admission control and QoS based resource
allocation in the BSS.
R99 QoS is taken into account if the PFC (Packet Flow Context) procedures are supported by the MS,
the BSS and the SGSN. It allows the BSS B9 to handle streaming and interactive traffics and also to
negotiate the QoS parameters.
R97/98 QoS should be also taken into account (OP12) if PFC is not supported by the MS or the SGSN in
order to handle interactive traffics or some specific applications as PoC (Push over Cellular).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 13
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 13
1 Basics
1.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
QoS subfeatures are of great interest in traffic-driven networks
(number of sites determined by the traffic to be carried, not by the
coverage per site). They will define the actual traffic shape in the
cell by allocating, in a selective manner, resources for (CS and) PS
calls. Here a traffic capacity gain is expected (higher traffic levels
can be handled with feature activated than without).
Radio interface impact
a) Support of PFC feature by RLC/MAC :
- PFC_FEATURE_MODE: this 1 bit field is a part of the R99 extensions in the GPRS_Cell_Options. It is
broadcasted on BCCH (SI13) or PBCCH (PSI1, PSI13 and PSI14) and indicates to the MSs if the network supports
the PFC feature.
- The PFC impact on the one phase access: "If the PFC_FEATURE_MODE is set in the system information and if a
PFC exists for the LLC data to be transferred then the PFI shall be transmitted along with the TLLI of the
mobile station in the RLC extended header during contention resolution. The PFI is not used for contention
resolution but is included to indicate to the network which PFC shall initially be associated with the uplink
TBF.
b) RLC/MAC/ messages impacts:
- PI bit (PFI indicator) is created, it indicates the presence of the optional PFI field:
0 PFI is not present
1 PFI is present if TI field indicates presence of TLLI
The PFI field indicates a PFI coded as it is defined in TS 44.018.
RLC/MAC messages impacted are:
Packet Resource Request : PFI field is added
(EGPRS) Packet DL ACK/NACK: PFI field is added (if a Channel Request Description is also present)
UL (EGPRS) RLC data blocks : PFI field is added after the TLLI field (see 44.060 10.2.2 and 10.3a.2).
PFI is included in the following SM messages :
Activate_PDP_Context_Accept,
Activate_Secundary_PDP_Context_Accept,
Modify_PDP_Context_Request (sent by the network) and
Modify_PDP_Context_Accept (in case the request to modify is sent by the MS).
PFC_FEATURE_MODE is included in the MS_Network_Capability I.E. (which is sent in the Attach_Request and
RA_Update_Request GMM messages).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 14
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 14
1 Basics
1.4 Dual Transfer Mode
This feature allows a dual transfer mode capable MS to use a radio
resource for CS traffic and simultaneously one or several radio
resources for PS traffic.
Single slot operation DTM MSs are not supported in Alcatel BSS
because the implementation of these MSs is difficult compared to
the throughput expected in PS services. Only multislot operation
DTM MSs are supported.
In Alcatels implementation, the Gs interface is required to support
DTM to ensure CS paging co-ordination. It avoids the BSS to ensure
the paging co-ordination.
While in dual transfer mode, the BSS only allocates full rate PDCH to
the MS.
The dynamic Abis feature allows to simplify the radio resource
allocations. It avoids defining new TBF re-allocation triggers.
!!!!! B10 FEATURE ONLY !!!!
Section 1 Module 1 Page 15
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 15
1 Basics
1.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
Some restrictions towards BSS in deploying DTM exist. They are
presented below:
Half rate
Support of half rate configurations (one single timeslot encompassing one half
rate circuit channel + one half rate packet channel) was not considered in the
first implementation of DTM.
Inter-cell handovers
The number of inter-cell handovers should be minimized for DTM calls, as an
inter-cell HO leads to the re-allocation of the packet session. Therefore,
handover causes having a low priority should be inhibited for the time the MS
is operating in DTM.
Intra-cell handovers
The number of intra-cell handovers should be minimized for DTM calls, as an
intra-cell HO leads to the re-allocation of the packet session.
Hierarchical networks
As (E)GPRS are preferentially offered in macro cells, the BSS shall ensure that
at least one PDCH can be used in micro cells to re-direct the MS towards the
macro cells. It means that the BSS shall allow a PDCH used by a MS operating in
DTM mode to be shared by other (E)GPRS MS.
!!!!! B10 FEATURE ONLY !!!!
Section 1 Module 1 Page 16
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 16
1 Basic
1.5 (E)GPRS MS Multislot Classes
Multislot
Class
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
RX Timeslots 1 2 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 4 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
TX Timeslots 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 4 6 2 3 4 4 6 8
Sum of
Timeslots
2 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.n.a.
EGPRS MS is characterized by two multislot classes:
GPRS multislot class
EGPRS multislot class
Typically, EGPRS multislot class < GPRS multislot class
E.g. the multislot class of the mobile can be 3 RXs + 2 TXs (class 6) in pure GPRS
mode and 2 RXs + 1 TX (class 2) in pure EGPRS mode
Type 1: class 1-12, class 19-29 recognized as class 10
Type 2: class 13-18, allocation is limited to max. 5+5 timeslots
MS type
Type 1 are simplex MSs, i.e., without duplexer: they are not able to transmit and receive at the same time
Type 2 are duplex MSs, i.e., with duplexer: they are able to transmit and receive at the same time
Rx
The maximum number of received time slots that the MS can use per TDMA frame. The receive TS shall be
allocated within window of size Rx, but they do not need to be contiguous. For SIMPLEX MS, no transmitted
TSs shall occur between receive TS within a TDMA frame. This does not take into account the measurement
window (Mx).
Tx
The maximum number of transmitted time slots that the MS can use per TDMA frame. The transmitted TS
shall be allocated within the window of size Tx, but they do not need to be contiguous. For SIMPLEX MS, no
received TS shall occur between transmit TS within a TDMA frame.
SUM
The maximum number of transmitted and received time slots (without Mx) per TDMA frame.
The meaning of Ttb, Tra et Trb changes regarding MS types.
For SIMPLEX MS (type 1):
- Ttb is the minimum time (in time slot) necessary between the Rx and Tx windows.
- Tra is the minimum time between the last Tx window and the first Rx window of the next TDMA in
order to be able to open a measurement window.
- Trb is the same as Tra without opening a measurement window.
For DUPLEX MS (type 2):
- Ttb is the minimum time necessary between 2 Tx windows belonging to different frames.
- Tra is the minimum time necessary between 2 Rx windows belonging to different frames in order to be
able to open a measurement window.
- Trb is the same as Tra without opening a measurement window.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 17
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 17
1 Basics
1.6 (E)GPRS General Architecture
(E)GPRS defines a network architecture dedicated to packet service
domain, with radio access, which allows service subscriber to send
and receive data in an end-to-end packet transfer mode
(E)GPRS uses the BSS architecture, but defines a fixed network
(GPRS backbone) which is different from the NSS, and which links
the BSS to PDNs (packet data networks). The BSS is used for both
circuit-switched and (E)GPRS services
The BSS has 2 clients:
the MSC, for circuit-switched services (A interface)
the GPRS backbone network, for GPRS (Gb interface)
one or more 64 kbit/s channels on one or more 2 Mbit/s links
Gb interface: Layer 1 specified in GSM 08.14
The protocol stack defined in the stage 2, GSM 03.60
Section 1 Module 1 Page 18
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 18
1 Basics
1.6 (E)GPRS General Architecture [cont.]
(E)GPRS general architecture
Gb
Interface
PDN
GPRS
backbone
Gi
Packet Switched services domain
BSS
MSC/VLR PSTN
Circuit Switched services domain
A
Interface
GPRS network = IP network
Note: Additional IP routers might be used to route the information between the GSNs (intra-PLMN
backbone network). All the elements connected to this backbone have private permanent IP
addresses.
Signaling protocols:
MAP/TCAP/SCCP/MTP on Gr, Gd and Gc (through the SGSN for the latter),
GTP/UDP/IP on Gn, BSSAP+/SCCP/MTP on Gs,
GMM/SM/LLC on Gb/Um.
Gc: for Network-Requested PDP contexts Activation (the GGSN asks the HLR for SGSN Routing
Information).
Gs: defines the Network Mode of Operation I. It allows to perform LA + RA combined Location Update,
and PS and CS Paging Coordination.
Gr: exchange of Subscription Information at Attachment Phase.
Additional interfaces:
Gf (to the EIR).
Gd to deliver the SMS to the mobiles via the GPRS network (SGSN option and subscriber feature).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 19
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 19
1 Basics
1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture
Packet Control Unit (PCU) function is defined by the GSM standard:
controls the (E)GPRS activity in a cell
handles RLC/MAC functions
may be either implemented in the BTS, BSC or the SGSN
Alcatel choice:
PCU implemented in a new network element, A 9135 MFS (Multi-BSS Fast
Packet Server)
smooth and cost effective introduction of the GPRS
The standard specifies that the PCU function shall be implemented in one of the 3 following entities:
BTS,
BSC,
after the BSC (in the SGSN for instance)
The implementation of the PCU functions determines the position of the Gb interface. ALCATEL chose
the MFS integration in order to offer a faster implementation inside the BSS as well as an easier
maintenance and supervision.
MFS: Multi BSS Fast packet Server.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 20
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 20
1 Basics
1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture [cont.]
Alcatel packet-switched service domain architecture:
BTS
Internet/
Intranet
SGSN GGSN MFS BSC
Fire-
wall
Other
PLMN
Packet domain
Gn Gb Ater
Abis
MS
Gi
Gp
Section 1 Module 1 Page 21
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 21
1 Basics
1.7 Alcatel (E)GPRS Architecture [cont.]
GPRS backbone is an IP network and is composed of routers:
Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN), at the same hierarchical level as the
MSC, which is linked to several BSSs. It keeps track of the individual MSs
location and performs security functions and access control
Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN), which is linked to one or several
data networks, provides interworking with external packet-switched
networks and is connected with SGSNs via an IP-based GPRS backbone
network
Section 1 Module 1 Page 22
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 22
1 Basics
1.8 (E)GPRS Protocol Layers (Transmission Plane)
NS
Network Service
GSM 08.16
RLC
Radio Link Control
GSM 04.60
http
Hypertext Transfer
Protocol
relay
MAC
Medium Access
Control
GSM 04.60
LLC
Logical Link Control
GSM 04.64
Physical
Link Layer
L1bis
Layer 1bis
GSM 08.14
Um Abis / Ater MS MFS BTS Gb SGSN
L1-GCH
Layer 1 GPRS
Channel
L2-GCH
Layer 2 GPRS
Channel
BSSGP
BSS GPRS Protocol
GSM 08.18
UDP
User Datagram
Protocol
RFC 768
TCP
Transmission Control
Protocol
RFC 793
or:
IP
Internet Protocol
RFC 791
GTP
GPRS Tunneling
Protocol
GSM 09.60
Gn GGSN
SNDCP
Subnetwork
Dependent
Convergence
Protocol
GSM 04.65
Ethernet
FR
Frame Relay
ATM
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
E1 (PCM30)
G.703 / G.704
Gi
relay
relay
TCP
Transmission Control
Protocol
RFC 793
RLC
Radio Link Control
GSM 04.60
MAC
Medium Access
Control
GSM 04.60
L1-GCH
Layer 1 GPRS
Channel
L2-GCH
Layer 2 GPRS
Channel
NS
Network Service
GSM 08.16
BSSGP
BSS GPRS Protocol
GSM 08.18
LLC
Logical Link Control
GSM 04.64
SNDCP
Subnetwork
Dependent
Convergence
Protocol
GSM 04.65
IP
Internet Protocol
RFC 791
GTP
GPRS Tunneling
Protocol
GSM 09.60
IP
Internet Protocol
RFC 791
and/or:
or:
UDP
User Datagram
Protocol
RFC 768
TCP
Transmission Control
Protocol
RFC 793
or:
Ethernet
FR
Frame Relay
ATM
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
E1 (PCM30)
G.703 / G.704
IP
Internet Protocol
RFC 791
and/or:
or:
A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

e
x
a
m
p
l
e
www
World Wide Web
Physical
RF Layer
Physical
Link Layer
Physical
RF Layer
L1bis
Layer 1bis
GSM 08.14
For the exact purposes of the tracing, please refer to Introduction to GPRS & E-GPRS Quality of
Service Monitoring It can be said from this protocol stacks diagram that after allocation of a GCH by
the BSC to the MFS, the data carried over the GCH are transparent for the BSC.
The RLC function defines the procedures for segmentation and reassemble of LLC PDUs into RLC/MAC
blocks and, in RLC acknowledged mode of operation, for the Backward Error Correction (BEC)
procedures enabling the selective retransmission of unsuccessfully delivered RLC/MAC blocks. In RLC
acknowledged mode of operation, the RLC function preserves the order of higher layer PDUs provided
to it. The RLC function provides also link adaptation. In EGPRS in RLC acknowledged mode of
operation, the RLC function may provide Incremental Redundancy (IR).
The MAC function defines the procedures that enable multiple mobile stations to share a common
transmission medium, which may consist of several physical channels. The function may allow a
mobile station to use several physical channels in parallel, i.e., use several time slots within the TDMA
frame. For the mobile station originating access, the MAC function provides the procedures, including
the contention resolution procedures, for the arbitration between multiple mobile stations
simultaneously attempting to access the shared transmission medium. For the mobile station
terminating access, the MAC function provides the procedures for queuing and scheduling of access
attempts.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 23
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 23
1 Basics
1.9 Alcatel (E)GPRS BSS Hardware support
BTS: Support of EGPRS (EDGE) in all BTS A9100 EVOLIUM Evolution
equipped with TRA transceiver:
G1 MK2 and G2 with DRFU: GPRS only, CS-1 and CS-2 only
A9100 EVOLIUM (G3): GPRS only, CS 1-4
A9100 EVOLIUM Evolution (G4): (E)GPRS, CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
micro BTS: support of EDGE in micro BTS A9110-E
Micro BTS A9110 (M4M): GPRS only, CS 1-4
Micro A9110-E (M5M): (E)GPRS, CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
BSC A9120 (G2)
MFS A9135
TC A9125 (Transcoder)
G2 and G2.5
Section 1 Module 1 Page 24
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 24
1 Basics
1.10 Modulation Technique: 8-PSK only for EGPRS
Q
I
010
011
100
101
111
110
001
000
Q
I
111
110
001
000
100
101
010
011
I
Q
110
100
000
010
101
001
011
111
t
Q
I
010
011
100
101
111
110
001
000
Q
I
010
011
100
101
111
110
001
000
Q
I
111
110
001
000
100
101
010
011
Q
I
111
110
001
000
100
101
010
011
I
Q
110
100
000
010
101
001
011
111
I
Q
110
100
000
010
101
001
011
111
t
Q
I
Q
I
dB
(147 bits)
P
N
0
-20
8-PSK = Phase Shift Keying
8-PSK is not a constant envelope modulation. Part of the information
is conveyed by the amplitude of the carrier which varies over time
An 8PSK signal carries three bits per modulated symbol over the radio
path which allows to tripled the data transmission rates
GMSK = the Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying belongs to a subset of phase modulations
8-PSK = 8-state Phase Shift Keying
8-PSK is not a constant envelope modulation. Part of the information is conveyed by the
amplitude of the carrier which varies over time.
An 8-PSK signal carries three bits per modulated symbol over the radio path, which allows to
triple the data transmission rates.
Modulation gross bit rate
The normal burst is divided into 156.35 symbol periods. A normal burst has a duration of 3/5.2
seconds (577 s). (3GPP TS 05.02).
For GMSK modulation, a symbol is equivalent to a bit (3GPP TS 05.04)
A GMSK burst is composed of 156.35 bits (6 tail bits + 26 training sequence bits + 116 encrypted
bits + 8.25 guard period (bits))
Modulation gross bit rate = (156.35 bits) / (3/5.2 seconds) = 270 Kbit/s
For 8-PSK modulation, one symbol corresponds to three bits (3GPP TS 05.04).
An 8-PSK burst is composed of 156.35 x 3 = 468.75 bits (18 tail bits + 78 training sequence bits +
348 encrypted bits + 24.75 guard period (bits)).
Modulation gross bit rate = (468.75 bits) / (3/5.2 seconds) = 810 Kbit/s
Amplitude varies constant Carrier envelope
EGPRS GPRS / EGPRS Packet radio service
810 Kbit/s 270 Kbit/s
Gross bit rate per
carrier
200 KHz 200 KHz Channel spacing
Phase modulation Frequency modulation Modulation type
8-PSK GMSK
Section 1 Module 1 Page 25
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 25
1 Basics
1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects
25 W / 44 dBm 60 W / 47.8 dBm 1800 HP
30 W / 44.8 dBm 45 W / 46.5 dBm 900 EDGE+
30W / 44.8 dBm 35 W / 45.4 dBm 1800 EDGE+
12 W / 40.8 dBm 35 W / 45.4 dBm 1800 MP
25 W / 44 dBm 60 W / 47.8 dBm 900 HP
15 W / 41.8 dBm 45 W / 46.5 dBm 900 MP
8-PSK output power GMSK output power TRA
Nominal output power (P
N
) of the transmitter represents the
average power during the active burst
GMSK average power is identical to GMSK peak power
8-PSK peak power is equal to GMSK peak power but the 8-PSK average
power is lower than the peak power
8-PSK power < GMSK power
the difference is called average power decrease (APD) or power
back off
G3 TREs are not able to handle the 8-PSK modulation. Only G4 TREs (also called TRA) are EDGE capable.
The TRA sensitivity is as follows :
GMSK : - 111 dBm.
8-PSK : - 108 dBm for MCS5, - 99 dBm for MCS9.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 26
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 26
1 Basics
1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects [cont.]
Unbalanced BTS configuration
Case 1: BS_TXPWR_MAX=0
Case 2: BS_TXPWR_MAX<>0
APD, takes into account the
BS_TXPWR_MAX and consequently the
Effective GMSK Sector Power
Always 8 PSK pwr GMSK pwr
APD = 0 if 8 PSK pwr > GMSK pwr
Used by Link Adaptation process
8-PSK Delta power ( 8-PSK) considers
only the GMSK sector power without the
BS_TXPWR_MAX
8-PSK 3 dB indicates that is a high
power TRE
GMSK POWER
8-PSK POWER
ATTENUATION
BS_TXPWR_MAX
8-PSK
APD
GMSK LEVELING
LEGEND
OUTPUT PWR
@ BTS ant.
connector
SECTOR
GMSK
8-PSK TRE 1
8-PSK TRE 2
HP TRE 1 MP TRE 1 HP TRE 1 MP TRE 2
-8PSK
= APD
-8PSK
= APD
APD = 0
Case 1 Case 2
APD: Average Power Decrease
The back-off between average GMSK and 8-PSK output power comes from physics since 8-PSK is a non
constant envelope modulation unlike GMSK.
As a consequence power amplifiers can not be used at their maximum power. This results in a
difference between mean output powers for GMSK and 8-PSK modulations.
Output power handling
The BTS sets all the TRE which transmit GMSK output powers at the same level which is the minimum
value among the maximum TRE output power in a sector and in a given band.
On a TRE, the maximum GMSK output power is higher than the maximum 8-PSK output power.
An O&M parameter (BS_TXPWR_MAX) allows a static power reduction of the maximum GMSK output
power of the sector.
The TRE transmit power in 8-PSK shall not exceed the GMSK transmit power in the sector.
The BTS determines for each TRE, the difference between the 8-PSK output power of the TRE and the
GMSK output power of the sector (8-PSK delta power).
According to the 8-PSK delta power value, a TRE is called High Power or Medium Power.
When a GCH channel is activated, the BTS sends the 8-PSK delta power to the MFS.
Together with BS_TXPWR_MAX (static power reduction), the 8-PSK delta power allows the MFS to
determine:
- a possible attenuation (BS_TX_PWR) for the 8-PSK DL RLC block emission, in order not to exceed
the GMSK power of the sector (for GMSK DL RLC block, the attenuation is BS_TXPWR_MAX).
- an Average Power Decrease which is the difference between the 8-PSK output power and the GMSK
output power after having taken into account BS_TXPWR_MAX. The Average Power Decrease is
taken into account in the link adaptation tables.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 27
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 27
1 Basics
1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects [cont.]
Example:
GSM 900, a mix BTS sector configuration is considered:
ANc combined with 4 TRA (TRAs = EGPRS capable TRE):
TRE 1 (BCCH): 60W GMSK (25W in 8-PSK)
TRE 2..4: 45W GMSK (15W in 8-PSK)
BS_TXPWR_MAX = 2 dB;
RESULTS:
1
st
step: Output power at BTS antenna connector (after combiner and
duplexer stage):
TRE 1 GMSK = 43.4 dBm; 8-PSK = 39.6 dBm
TRE 2..4 GMSK = 42.1 dBm; 8-PSK = 37.4 dBm
2
nd
step: LEVELING (BTS automatic GMSK power balancing):
TRE 1..4 GMSK = 42.1 dBm (Sector GMSK power)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 28
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 28
1 Basics
1.11 8-PSK TRA Power Aspects [cont.]
3
rd
step: 8-PSK Delta computation
TRE 1 = 42.1 39.6 = 2.5 dBm < 3 dBm recognized as HP TRE
TRE 2..4 = 42.1 37.4 = 4.7 dBm recognized as MP TREs
4
th
step: static attenuation (only on GMSK power)
TRE 1..4 GMSK = 42.1 2 = 40.1 dBm (Effective GMSK Sector Power)
5
th
step: GMSK power 8-PSK power ?
YES, since 40.1 dBm 39.6 dBm 37.4 dBm no reduction of 8-PSK power
6
th
step: APD computation
APD TRE 1 (BCCH) = 40.1 39.6 = 0.5 dBm
APD TRE 2..4 = 40.1 37.4 = 2.7 dBm
3GPP 05.08 constraint on the transmitted power of BCCH frequency:
BCCH frequency shall usually be transmitted at a constant level. A tolerance has been
introduced with 8-PSK: a fluctuation of up to 2 dB is allowed
If APD is greater than 2 dB, a static power attenuation should be applied or EGPRS
capability should not be activated on the BCCH TRE
Radio Network Planning Impact
Frequency hopping is not recommended for E-GPRS (MCS-1 to MCS-9)
Therefore, the system is allocating a higher priority for the packet-switched traffic for non-hopping
TRX in a cell.
In addition, the non-hopping TRX may benefit from a special radio planning with higher reuse cluster
size, in order to ensure higher C/I conditions and offer better throughputs, both for GPRS and EDGE.
APD should be considered in the A9155 planning tool for the throughput estimation (based on
interference calculation per pixel approach) and also to determine the 8-PSK coverage.
The IR gain should also be considered in the throughput estimation. 3 dB can be taken for the average
IR gain.
PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX is a flag at cell level which indicates whether the operator wishes to allocate
packet on the BCCH TRX with highest priority. Actually, is recommended to activate GPRS/EDGE
traffic on the BCCH TRX due to its high RCS. However the activation of EDGE on the BCCH TRX should
be performed cautiously.
3GPP Rec. 05.08 has defined a constraint on the transmitted power of BCCH frequency. This
frequency shall usually be transmitted at a constant level. A tolerance has been introduced with 8-
PSK: a fluctuation of up to 2 dB is allowed. Depending on the configuration in the BTS, it may happen
that the difference between GMSK and 8-PSK power on the BCCH TRX is greater than 2dB. A possible
solution for this constraint, in case of a BTS (e.g. ANc combined) equipped only with MP TRX (most of
the cases) is presented below: The BCCH MP TRX will be replaced by a HP TRX (to take also
advantage from 8-PSK 25W power and <3dB) BS_TXPWR_MAX will be set to 2 dB The difference
between GMSK and 8-PSK power on BCCH TRX will be: (42.1 2) 39.6 = 0.5 dB which respects the
ETSI constraint. The drawback is that CS and GPRS service may be affected by the GMSK output
power reduction.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 29
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 29
1 Basics
1.12 (E)GPRS Radio Blocks Structure
In order to be transmitted over the air interface, the LLC data is
segmented at RLC layer into packets, called (E)GPRS radio blocks
Radio block characteristics:
a block is the smallest data unit assigned to an user
one radio block is always entirely assigned to one user; inside a block
there is no multiplexing of different users possible
the whole information belonging to one radio block is transmitted upon
channel coding, in a certain timeslot over 4 consecutive TDMA frames
the data amount carried in one (E)GPRS radio block is:
456 bits in GPRS (GMSK modulation)
464 bits in EGPRS (GMSK modulation)
1392 bits in EGPRS (8-PSK modulation)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 30
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 30
EGPRS Radio Block (data transfer)
RLC/MAC header: control fields which are different for uplink and downlink directions
RLC Data Field: LLC PDUs bytes; contains one or two RLC data blocks
Block Check Sequence (BCS): for error detection of the data part
Header Check Sequence (HCS): for error detection of the header part
1 Basics
1.12 (E)GPRS Radio Blocks Structure [cont.]
GPRS Radio Block (data transfer)
MAC header: control fields which are different for uplink and downlink directions
RLC header: control fields which are different for uplink and downlink directions
RLC Data Block: bytes from one or more LLC PDUs
Block Check Sequence (BCS): used for error detection
MAC header RLC data block RLC header BCS
BCS HCS RLC/MAC header RLC data block 1 RLC data block 2
only MCS-7/8/9
Section 1 Module 1 Page 31
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 31
1 Basics
1.13 GPRS Channel Coding
Channel coding provides error detection and error correction
Essential for managing the impairments on the air interface
Data rates in GPRS on the air interface
The useful data rates on the air interface depend on the channel coding
procedure
For (E)GPRS, different channel coding levels are applied depending on
the actual radio conditions
Section 1 Module 1 Page 32
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 32
1 Basics
1.13 GPRS Channel Coding [cont.]
Four different coding schemes, CS-1 to CS-4, are defined for the
GPRS Radio Blocks carrying RLC data, and are applied depending
from the actual radio conditions
The first step of the channel coding procedure is to add a Block
Check Sequence (BCS) for error detection
For CS-1 to CS-3, the second step consists of pre-coding USF
(except for CS-1), adding four tail bits and a half rate
convolutional coding for error correction that is punctured to give
the desired coding rate
For CS-4 there is no coding for error correction
The most protected mode is CS-1 which is therefore always used for
GPRS signaling (even for EGPRS)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 33
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 33
1 Basics
1.13 GPRS Channel Coding [cont.]
8.0 0.50 Half rate convolutional
coding
GMSK CS-1
12.0 0.66 Half rate convolutional
coding, punctured
GMSK CS-2
14.4 0.75 Half rate convolutional
coding, punctured
GMSK CS-3
20.0 1.00 No coding GMSK CS-4
Maximum data rate
per TS (RLC payload)
[kbps]
Code
rate
Coding schemes
for RLC data block
Modulation
schemes
Scheme
8
12
14.4
CS-1
CS-2
CS-3
CS-4 20
GMSK
modulation
Header + Protection
Maximum User Payload [kbps]
USF BCS
rate 1/2 convolutional coding
456 bits
puncturing
Interleaving of GPRS Radio Block over 4
consecutive TDMAs (4 PDCH)
GPRS RADIO BLOCK
Release B8
Section 1 Module 1 Page 34
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 34
1 Basics
1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding
Nine different coding schemes are defined: MCS-1 to MCS-9
First step of the EGPRS coding procedure, is to add a Block Check
Sequence (BCS) to each RLC data block, for error detection
Second step consists of adding six tail bits (TB) and a 1/3 rate
convolutional coding for error correction that is punctured to give
the desired coding rate
The Pi (puncturing schemes) for each MCS correspond to different
puncturing schemes achieving the same coding rate
Puncturing is a technique of removing bits in predetermined locations of the
data block after the block has been channel coded
MCS-9, MCS-8, MCS-7, MCS-4, MCS-3: are possible P1, P2, and P3
MCS-6, MCS-5, MCS-2, MCS-1: P1 and P2 are possible
The puncturing process consists of transmitting only some of the coded bits obtained after the rate 1/3
convolutional coding. Depending on the considered puncturing scheme, different coded bits are transmitted.
Therefore, when the receiver receives two versions of the same RLC block sent with two different puncturing
schemes, it obtains additional information leading to an increased decoding probability.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 35
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 35
1 Basics
1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]
MCSs are divided into 4 different families: A, A, B and C
Each family has a different basic payload unit:
37 bytes: family A
34 bytes: family A (padding)
28 bytes: family B
22 bytes: family C
When switching to MCS-3 or MCS-6 from MCS-8, 3 or 6 padding bytes, are
added to the data bytes
Within a family different throughputs are achieved by transmitting a
different number of basic payload units within one block
impact on retransmission
Offset the GPRS disadvantage on retransmission
Section 1 Module 1 Page 36
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 36
1 Basics
1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]
8.8
11.2
14.8
11.2 x 2 = 22.4
14.8 x 2 = 29.6
11.2 x 4 = 44.8
padding (MCS-3/6) 54.4
14.8 x 4 = 59.2
MCS-1
MCS-2
MCS-3
MCS-4
MCS-5
MCS-6
MCS-7
MCS-8
MCS-9
8.8 x 2 = 17.6
GMSK
8-PSK
Header + Protection
Maximum User Payload [kbit/s]
37 octets 37 octets 37 octets 37 octets
MCS-3
MCS-6
Family A
MCS-9
28 octets 28 octets 28 octets 28 octets
MCS-2
MCS-5
MCS-7
Family B
22 octets 22 octets
MCS-1
MCS-4
Family C
34 +3 octets 34 +3 octets
MCS-3
MCS-6
Family A
padding
MCS-8
34 octets 34 octets 34 octets 34 octets
The main GPRS imperfections are linked to:
the design of the GPRS coding schemes which were designed independently from the others with
their own data unit.
the fact that once the information contained in an radio block has been transmitted with a
certain CS, it is not possible via the Automatic ReQuest for repetition (ARQ) mechanism to
retransmit with another CS.
- This could lead to the release of the TBF and to the establishment of a new one in order to
transmit the LLC frame.
EGPRS coding schemes have been designed to offset this problem. Four MCS families have been
created with for each of them a basic unit of payload.
This allows the re-segmentation of the RLC data blocks when changing of modulation and coding
schemes (within the same family).
- Example: if one MCS-6 radio block has not been received correctly by the receiver and if
radio conditions have degraded in the meantime, it is possible to re-send the same
information in two radio blocks with MCS-3 (more protection).
The level of protection applied (MCS usage) in case of retransmissions is in line with the radio
conditions.
The different code rates within a family are achieved by transmitting a different number of payload
units within one radio block. When 4 payload units are transmitted, these are split into 2 separate RLC
blocks (i.e., with separate sequence numbers).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 37
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 37
1 Basics
1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]
MCS-9 basic payload unit = 37 bytes = 296 bits
MCS-9 RLC data block = 2 x basic payload unit =2* 296 bits = 592 bits
MCS-9 RLC payload throughput= 592 bits / 10 ms = 59.2 Kbps
USF HCS
RLC/MAC
header
E FBI
RLC Data Block
= 592 bits
BCS TB E FBI
RLC Data Block =
592 bits
BCS TB
36 bits
3 bits
135 bits 1836 bits 1836 bits
SB=8 36 bits 124 bits 612 bits 612 bits 612 bits 612 bits 612 bits 612 bits
puncturing puncturing
P3 P1 P2 P1 P2 P3
45 bits 612 bits 612 bits
1392 bits
Rate 1/3 convolutional coding Rate 1/3 convolutional coding
puncturing
Interleaving of the EGPRS Radio Block over 4 consecutive TDMAs
EGPRS MCS-9 RADIO BLOCK
MCS-9 Example:
Section 1 Module 1 Page 38
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 38
1 Basics
1.14 EGPRS Channel Coding [cont.]
8.8 0.53 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
GMSK MCS-1
11.2 0.66 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
GMSK MCS-2
14.8 0.80 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
GMSK MCS-3
17.6 1.00 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
GMSK MCS-4
22.4 0.37 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
8PSK MCS-5
29.6 0.49 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
8PSK MCS-6
44.8 0.76 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
8PSK MCS-7
54.4 0.92 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
8PSK MCS-8
59.2 1.00 1/3 rate convolutional
coding, punctured
8PSK MCS-9
Maximum data rate per TS (RLC
payload)
[kbps]
Code
rate
Coding schemes
for RLC data block
Modulation
schemes
Scheme
Uplink
transfer
Section 1 Module 1 Page 39
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 39
1 Basics
1.15 Radio Link Adaptation Overview
(M)CS schemes are dynamically selected based on the quality of the
radio channel, in order to maximize the throughput
Two different mechanisms exists for GPRS and EGPRS:
CS Adaptation in case of GPRS TBF mode and
Link Adaptation (LA) in case of EGPRS TBF mode
Selection of the most suitable (M)CS is based on measurements
reported by the MS for the downlink path and by the BTS for the
uplink path
Section 1 Module 1 Page 40
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 40
1 Basics
1.16 Automatic ReQuest for repetition (ARQ)
In the ARQ method, when the receiver detects the presence of
errors in a received RLC block, it requests and receives a re-
transmission of the same RLC block from the transmitter
The retransmission can be performed using:
Type-I ARQ mechanism. This applies for both GPRS and EGPRS mode
Type-II hybrid ARQ mechanism, also called Incremental Redundancy (IR).
This applies only for DL EGPRS mode
IR is optional for the BTS, but is mandatory for the EGPRS MS (3GPP
requirement)
B9
!!! ARQ type-II applies for UL and DL EGPRS mode !!!
Section 1 Module 1 Page 41
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 41
1 Basics
1.17 Type-I ARQ mechanism
In the selective type-I ARQ mechanism, the receiver discards the
erroneous blocks, and indicates in the acknowledgement messages
the reference of these erroneous blocks for their retransmission.
Then, the sending side has to retransmit the erroneous data RLC
blocks
MS
Uplink RLC data block B1 / PDTCH (1)
MFS
Packet UplinkAck/Nack /PACCH (3)
Uplink RLC data block B2 / PDTCH (2)
Uplink RLC data block B2 / PDTCH (4)
Uplink RLC data block B3 / PDTCH (5)
The Block 2 has been
unsuccessfully received
MS retransmits the uplink
RLC data block B2
With the type 1 ARQ mechanism, the decoding of a re-transmitted RLC block does not use the
previously transmitted versions (not correctly received) of this RLC block. The decoding of a RLC data
block is only based on the current transmission.
The type 1 ARQ mechanism is always used for the GPRS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 42
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 42
1 Basics
1.18 Type-I ARQ in GPRS
GPRS CSs are designed independently from the others with its own basic
payload unit size, so the family concept does not exists in GPRS
Before its transmission over the radio interface, the LLC frame is segmented
into payload units according to CS that will be used to transmit the radio
block
In case of erroneous reception, the RLC data block can be retransmitted
only with the same CS (segmentation is not possible)
If the radio conditions have changed and the coding rate is not appropriate to
them, the receiver will never be able to decode the retransmission of the RLC
data block. This will lead to the release of the TBF and the establishment of a
new one in order to transmit the LLC frame
In order to avoid this problem, the choice of the CS on the network side has to
be made carefully. This often results in an non-optimized use of the radio
interface, leading to a reduction of network capacity compared with its
theoretical capacity
G
P
R
S

D
R
A
W
B
A
C
K
Section 1 Module 1 Page 43
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 43
1 Basics
1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS
MCSs have been designed to offset the GPRS disadvantage
MCS family concept is applied
In EGPRS, in case of retransmission request (type-I ARQ) for a RLC data
block, the same or a next lower MCS within the same family is used
The retransmission can be performed with or w/o RLC data segmentation (e.g.
from MCS-9 to MCS-6 w/o, and MCS-6 to MCS-3 with segmentation)
When one RLC data block is retransmitted with a lower MCS, the coding rate is
decreased by two, but the redundancy transmitted is increased
That increases the capability to decode the radio block !
Retransmission operates in connection with the link adaptation
E.g. if the LA mechanism orders the usage of MCS-5 and the first transmission of
an erroneous RLC block was with MCS-6, the transmission will be performed with
MCS-3. The blocks that are sent for the first time will be transmitted with the
last-ordered MCS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 44
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 44
1 Basics
1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS [cont.]
Type-II ARQ (IR) is an efficient combination of 2 techniques:
Automatic Repeat reQuest : in case of error detection in a received RLC block, a
re-transmission of the same RLC data block is requested
Forward Error Correction : adds redundant information to the user information at
the transmitter, the receiver uses the info to correct errors causes by radio
disturbances
In the IR mechanism:
The information which is sent first results from an initial puncturing scheme
(PS1) applied to the encoded RLC data block
If an error is detected by the receiver:
the received message is stored
selective retransmission of the RLC data block is requested
a second puncturing scheme (PS2) is applied to the same MCS, by the sender
the receiver decodes (combines) the resulting message together with the previously
received message(s)
multiple retransmission can be requested until decoding succeeds
The type 2 ARQ mechanism or incremental redundancy (IR) is an ETSI function, mandatory for the EGPRS MS
receiver (downlink path) and optional for the BTS receiver (uplink path). In B8 release, the IR feature is only
available on the downlink path. It is important to notice that the IR feature is always running in the EDGE MS
receiver (except in case of MS memory shortage). The DL incremental redundancy is not used for the signaling
blocks, the GPRS data blocks and the data blocks in RLC unacknowledged mode. It is only used for the EGPRS data
blocks in RLC acknowledged mode.
In the type II ARQ mechanism (IR):
the first emission of a RLC data block is done using a first puncturing scheme (PS1),
in case of re-transmission of this RLC block, the transmitter uses the same MCS or a MCS of the same family
than the one used for the initial block. On the DL path, depending on the value of the parameter
EN_FULL_IR_DL, re-segmentation of the RLC block may be performed or not,
at the output of the demodulator, the receiver combines the information of soft bits corresponding to the
first transmission of the block and its different re-transmissions, thus increasing the decoding probability of
the RLC block.
Remark : according to the 04.60 (RLC/MAC layers) GSM recommendation, the soft-combining inside the MS
receiver is only performed between an :
- MCSx block and MCSx block (that is the same MCS is used for the re-transmission),
- MCS9 block and an MCS6 block (in that case the RLC data blocks carry the same number of payload
units),
- MCS7 block and an MCS5 block (in that case the RLC data blocks carry the same number of payload
units).
If the "MS OUT OF MEMORY" field is set by the mobile in the EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack message, the type I ARQ
shall apply in the MS receiver (ARQ without IR). This occurs when the memory for IR operation runs out in the MS
(that is when the memory of the MS is full due to the storage of the different versions of a RLC block not
correctly decoded).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 45
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 45
1 Basics
1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS [cont.]
puncturing
scheme 1
puncturing
scheme 2
Nack
MS BTS MFS
Data Block
Data Block
Data Block
Data Block
Data Block
Data Block
(1) The BSS sends a DL data block
using the puncturing scheme P1 and
MCS-6. B1 is not successfully
decoded by the MS. The MS stores
the received block
(2) The MS requests a selective
retransmission of the erroneous
block, in the next EGPRS Packet DL
Ack/Nack
(3) The MS retransmits the DL data
block using a new puncturing
scheme P2 and the same MCS-6.
If the block header is correctly
decoded, the MS decodes the data
making soft combination with the
previous transmission
In the puncturing scheme selection for re-transmission, 2 cases have to be considered:
if the selected MCS has not changed : if all the different punctured versions of the data block have
been sent, the procedure shall start over and PS1 shall be used, followed by PS2, then by PS3 (if
available for the considered MCS), so that the PS selection is cyclic,
if the selected MCS has changed : the PS to be used is indicated by the table below.
Previous MCS New MCS Previous PS New PS
PS1 or PS3 PS1 MCS9 MCS6
PS2 PS2
PS1 PS3 MCS6 MCS9
PS2 PS2
MCS7 MCS5 PS1, PS2 or PS3 PS1
MCS5 MCS7 PS1 or PS2 PS2
All other combinations Any PS1

Section 1 Module 1 Page 46
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 46
1 Basics
1.19 Type-I ARQ in EGPRS [cont.]
B9 release: the IR mechanism is implemented in uplink and
downlink
This mechanism is associated with link adaptation in order to
provide superior radio efficiency on the air interface
IR feature is always running in the EGPRS MS receivers, except when
a memory shortage is reported by the MS the stored packets are
discarded and type-I ARQ is set !
Parameter for IR activation:
EN_FULL_IR_DL which enable or disable the RLC data segmentation for
retransmissions
EN_FULL_IR_DL = disable; e.g. if MCS-5 is ordered by LA, and the first
transmission was with MCS-6 then, the retransmission is performed with MCS-3
(segmentation on the initial RLC data block, ARQ Type-I)
EN_FULL_IR_DL=enable; even if MCS-5 is ordered, the retransmission is
performed with MCS-6 (no segmentation, ARQ Type-II)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 47
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 47
1 Basics
1.20 (E)GPRS radio physical channel: PDCH Concept
Packet Data Channel (PDCH)
(E)GPRS radio access method = GSM TDMA (8 timeslots per carrier)
One PDCH represents a physical channel (1 timeslot) dedicated to packet
data traffic (GPRS/EDGE), over the radio interface
PDCH group
The available PDCHs are grouped into PDCH groups
One PDCH group contains consecutive timeslots (without TS holes)
belonging to the same TRX, having the same radio configuration
possible to have hopping and non hopping PDCH groups in one cell
maximum number of PDCH groups/cell is equal to 16 (equal to maximum
number of TRX / cell)
16 TRX/cell achieved with help of the B7 feature cell split over 2 BTSs, EVOLIUM BTS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 48
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 48
1 Basics
1.21 (E)GPRS Multiframe
12 radio blocks (B0 to B11) form a 52-(E)GPRS multiframe
The frames 25 and 51 are idle frames and the frames 12 and 38 are
used for the PTCCH
One TDMA frame
= 8 TS (4,615 ms)
One PDCH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 47 48 49 50
One 52 -multiframe (240 ms)
Block B0 Block B1 Block B2 Block B3
16
T
PTCCH
Block B11
51
X
idle
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Section 1 Module 1 Page 49
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 49
1 Basics
1.22 (E)GPRS Logical Channels
EGPRS is reusing the existing GPRS logical channels
Packet logical channels are mapped in one physical channel (PDCH)
using the technique of multiframing
The sharing of the PDCH is done on blocks basis
PBCCH (Packet Broadcast Control Channel) used for broadcasting
system information (SI)
PCCCH (Packet Common Control Channel) used to initiate packet
transfer
PRACH (Packet Random Access Channel)
PPCH (Packet Paging Channel)
PAGCH (Packet Access Grant Channel)
!!! MASTER CHANNEL ONLY !!!
Section 1 Module 1 Page 50
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 50
1 Basics
1.22 (E)GPRS Logical Channels [cont.]
PTCH (Packet Traffic Channel) used for user data transmission and
its associated signaling
PDTCH (Packet Data Traffic Channel) used to carry user data (LLC PDU
segmented is RLC/MAC blocks)
PACCH (Packet Associated Control Channel)
Bidirectional channel, dynamically allocated on block basis, used to carry
control data
In Alcatel BSS is always allocated on one of the PDCHs on which PDTCHs are
allocated
PTCCH (Packet Timing Advance Control Channel) used for
continuous timing advance mechanism
Bidirectional channel allocated on the same PDCH as the PACCH
Section 1 Module 1 Page 51
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 51
1 Basics
1.23 Master/Slave PDCH concept
A PDCH which carries a PCCCH or/and a PBCCH channel is called
Master PDCH (MPDCH)
MPDCH which carries the PBCCH is called Primary MPDCH
Primary MPDCH is the GPRS BCCH
MPDCH which carries only PCCCH is called Secondary MPCH
All other PDCHs, active as slaves, are called Slave PDCH (SPDCH)
B8 release:
MPDCHs are statically established only on BCCH TRX
Up to 4 MPDCHs can be supported per cell (max Nb_TS_MPDCH=4)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 52
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 52
1 Basics
1.24 Temporary Block Flow
The packet data call is a Temporary Block Flow (TBF)
For a data packet transmission, a temporary physical connection (TBF)
will be set up as an unidirectional link
Each TBF is unidirectional: Uplink TBF and Downlink TBF for the same
mobile are uncorrelated
One TBF allocates radio resources on one or more PDCH and comprise a
number of RLC/MAC blocks carrying one or more LLC PDUs
TBF is only temporary and maintained for the duration of the data
transfer
Either the mobile or the network can initiate a TBF
Temporary Flow Identity (TFI):
Each TBF is assigned a TFI by the MFS.
Important:
Since B7, it is possible to establish 32 TBFs per PDCH group (See sub-session 2.2 for PDCH group
definition).
TBF
is a group of blocks dynamically allocated to one MS for one transfer of RLC blocks in one direction
inside one cell.
A Temporary Block Flow is a temporary, unidirectional physical connection across the Um interface,
between one mobile and the BSS. The TBF is established when data units are to be transmitted across
the Um interface and is released as soon as the transmission is completed.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 53
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 53
1 Basics
1.24 Temporary Block Flow [cont.]
TFI (Temporary Flow Identity)
RLC layer
Each TBF is assigned a TFI by the MFS
TFI is unique on a given PDCH, in a given direction
A TBF is addressed by a Temporary Flow Identity (TFI)
More than 32 TFI values per TRX (PDCH group) for each direction (i.e. DL
and UL)
TLLI (Temporary Logical Link Identity)
LLC layer
The TLLI identifies the logical link between the MS and the SGSN
The TLLI is allocated by the SGSN to the MS in Standby and Ready states
Section 1 Module 1 Page 54
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 54
1 Basics
1.25 Resources Sharing
Two different resource sharing mechanisms exists:
PDCH multiplexing
Multislot usage
Allows optimum usage of the available radio resources
PDCH Multiplexing
PDCH multiplexing refers to the sharing of one PDCH by more than two users
(TBFs)
It occurs when there are more requests for PDCH resources than available PDCHs
A maximum number of UL/DL_TBF can share the same PDCH in UL and DL
direction respectively
MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH=6; MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH=10
When a PDCH is shared between an UL GPRS TBF and a DL EGPRS TBF, then the DL
EGPRS shall be limited to GMSK (i.e. MCS-4) GPRS MS becomes candidate for
radio resource reallocation
Section 1 Module 1 Page 55
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 55
1 Basics
1.25 Resources Sharing [cont.]
Multislot usage
Refers to the case when 1 user can request at once more than 2 PDCH
resources for the data transmission
Up to 5 PDCH on different (but consecutive) timeslots on the same
frequency could be allocated to one mobile at the same time (MS
multislot capability)
B8 & B9 release supports 4+2 slots for Type 1 MS and 5+5 for Type 2 MS
The PDCH blocks will be consecutively transmitted over the PDCH
only if there is no user multiplexing
Section 1 Module 1 Page 56
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 56
1 Basics
1.25 Resources Sharing [cont.]
PDCH Multiplexing example:
lets assume that the data for user 1 has a length of 3 blocks (length of
TBF 1=3 blocks) and is transmitted over PDCH #2
as soon as one block of user 1 was entirely transmitted, another user 2
can use the same PDCH #2 to transmit the blocks of its own TBF of e.g.
length = 4 blocks, followed by the user 3 transmission...
the blocks of user 1, user 2 and user 3 will not be transmitted in
consecutive order:
as soon as one block of user 1 is transmitted, another block of user 2 can be
transmitted, continued with a block of the user 3 over the same PDCH #2
Multislot usage example:
User 1 has (1+1) and users 2 & user 3 have (3+1) MS multislot capability
Section 1 Module 1 Page 57
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 57
1 Basics
1.25 Resources Sharing [cont.]
PDCH Multiplexing and Multislot Usage example
User 1:
no multislot
capability
User 2:
with multislot
capability
User 3:
with multislot
capability
TFI = 5
TFI = 9
TFI = 13
PDCH 2
PDCH 1
PDCH 3
User 1 User 1
User 2 User 2
User 2
User 2
User 2
User 2
User 2
User 2
User 2
User 3
User 3
User 3
User 3
User 3
User 3 User 3
Multislot capability
Block n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 n+5 ...
User multiplexing
n
User multiplexing
Section 1 Module 1 Page 58
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 58
1 Basics
1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination
DL TBF (PDTCH and PACCH)
MS decodes all blocks on its allocated PDCH
The MS can identify the PDCH blocks intended for it by TFI present on
the RLC block header
UL TBF (PDTCH and PACCH)
For an UL TBF, the mobile receives one USF (Uplink State Flag) per
PDCH to be used during the TBF
If the MS receives its USF on the DL block n of PDCH 5, it can transmit in
UL using the block n+1 of PDCH 5
Downlink PDTCH and PACCH blocks multiplexing:
The multiplexing of the different MSs is performed thanks to the TFI which is present in the RLC
block header.
An MS decodes all the blocks of all its allocated PDCHs and keeps the blocks carrying its TFI in the
RLC header.
Uplink PDTCH and PACCH for a UL TBF:
At UL TBF establishment, a MS receives a USF (Uplink State Flag, 8 values, MAC header) per allocated
PDCH.
If the MS receives its USF on the downlink block n of PDCH I, it can transmit in uplink using the block
n+1 of PDCH i.
NB: the values of the USF are entirely dedicated to PDTCH and PACCH transfers. See further (MPDCH
and RRBP) The TFI is use in the UL as well: each mobile shall put its TFI in the UL header of the UL
blocks during a UL TBF, as well as in the RLC header of the UL PACCH blocks of a DL TBF. So we can say
that the de-multiplexing of the blocks is achieved by the use of a TFI.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 59
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 59
1 Basics
1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination [cont.]
Uplink PACCH for a DL TBF :
By the means of the polling mechanism, periodically an UL PACCH block
is allocated during DL transfer, e.g. to allow an MS to request the
establishment of an UL TBF by including a Channel Request description in
a Packet DL Ack/Nack message
the MS has no USF because it is involved in a DL TBF
use of the RRBP (Relative Reserved Block Period) field transmitted in
downlink
RRBP values indicates the number of TDMA frames the MS shall wait before
transmitting its uplink RLC/MAC block
a special USF value is used: USF = no emission
RRBP: Relative Radio Block Period
Allocation of a PACCH block for the sending of acknowledgements in the UL of blocks received in the
DL:
The MS has no USF because it is involved in a DL TBF
Use of the RRBP field transmitted in the downlink (MAC header) in association with the TFI of the DL
TBF in the RLC header.
At the exact occurrence of the RRBP, a special USF value is used for the UL TBF taking place on the
same PDCH: USF=no emission.
It is a semi-boolean parameter. The RRBP field of a RLC/LAC block is checked each time by the MS
whose TFI is written in the RLC header.
When S/P is false, no UL PACCH is scheduled.
When the RRBP field is valid, the value gives the number of blocks to wait before sending its PACCH
block in the UL
S/P is false means MS has to send an acknowledgement message to the MFS.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 60
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 60
Example of a Uplink Block Flow scheduling:
1 Basics
1.26 MS multiplexing co-ordination [cont.]
Downlink Downlink Downlink Downlink Uplink Uplink Uplink Uplink
Block
number
TFI USF RRBP
Bn TFIa USFj
Bn+1 TFIb USFk PDTCHj
Bn+2 TFIa USFj +3 PDTCHk
Bn+3 TFIb FREE PDTCHj
Bn+4 TFIb No
Emission
PRACH
Bn+5 TFIb USFj PACCHa
Bn+6 TFIa USFk PDTCHj
Section 1 Module 1 Page 61
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 61
1 Basics
1.27 GPRS mobility management (GMM) states for MS
Idle
Ready
Standby
GPRS
attach
GPRS
detach
PDU transmission
Timer
expiry
Timer
expiry
Idle
the MS is not attached to the
packet network: paging is not
possible
Ready
the MS location is known with
the cell accuracy
Standby
the MS is attached to the
network: paging is possible
the MS location is known with
the RA accuracy
Idle: the MS is not attached to the network: paging is not possible.
Standby:
the MS is attached to the network: paging is possible.
the MS location is known in the CN with the RA accuracy.
Ready:
the MS location is known with the cell accuracy.
timer T_READY keeps the MS in the Ready state just after data transfer.
Packet Idle Mode:
no Temporary Block Flow exists. Upper layers can require the transfer of an LLC PDU which, implicitly, may trigger the
establishment of TBF and transition to packet transfer mode.
the MS listens to the PBCCH and to the paging sub-channel for the paging group the MS belongs to in idle mode. If PCCCH is not
present in the cell, the mobile station listens to the BCCH and to the relevant paging sub-channels.
Packet Transfer Mode:
In packet transfer mode, the mobile station is allocated radio resource providing a Temporary Block Flow on one or more
physical channels. Continuous transfer of one or more LLC PDUs is possible. Concurrent TBFs may be established in opposite
directions. Transfer of LLC PDUs in RLC acknowledged or RLC unacknowledged mode is provided.
When selecting a new cell, mobile station leaves the packet transfer mode, enters the packet idle mode where it switches to
the new cell, read the system information and may then resume to packet transfer mode in the new cell.
The timers regulating the transition between states are SGSN timers, not tunable in the BSS. Caution: Idle mode in GPRS and Idle
mode in GSM are two different states.
A GSM MS in Idle mode is attached to a MSC and can be paged
A GPRS MS in Idle mode is NOT attached to a SGSN, so it cannot be paged but can monitor the GPRS information broadcast in
the SI13 of the BCCH.
Standby is the closest GPRS MS state to Idle GSM.
The MS state in the SGSN shall be considered apart from the Packet Transfer Mode in the BSS:
MS in Standby mode can be in Packet Transfer Mode.
MS in Ready mode can be in Packet Idle Mode.
The detach procedure is usually triggered by the MS. Three other types of detach are triggered by the CN:
HLR Detach,
SGSN Detach upon SGSN overload,
SGSN Detach upon timer.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 62
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 62
1 Basics
1.28 Radio Resource (RR) operating modes for MS
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM)
MS is allocated radio resource on one or more PDCHs for the transfer of
LLC PDUs. Continuous transfer of LLC PDUs is possible
Packet Idle Mode (PIM)
No TBF exists and the MS is also not trying to establish an UL TBF
GMM states versus RR operating modes:
PIM: There is no on-going TBF established and GMM ready
timer is no more running
GMM Standby
PIM: TBF closed but GMM ready timer is still running
PTM: TBF opened
GMM Ready
RR Operating Modes GMM States
Section 1 Module 1 Page 63
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 63
1 Basics
1.29 Attach procedure
Aim
to access to GPRS services, a MS must first make its presence known to
the network by performing a GPRS attach to the SGSN
GPRS attach function is similar to IMSI attach
MS authentication
Ciphering key generation
TLLI allocation (derived from the new P-TMSI)
Subscriber profile request to the HLR
Section 1 Module 1 Page 64
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 64
1 Basics
1.29 Attach procedure [cont.]
Results
A logical link between the MS and the SGSN is created
MS is in Standby state and may activate a PDP context
MS location is known (RA accuracy)
MS is available for paging via the SGSN
Charging information is collected
Combined GPRS and IMSI attach is possible for class A/B MS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 65
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 65
1 Basics
1.30 PDP context activation
Aim
in order to send and receive GPRS data, the MS must activate the PDP
(Packet Data Protocol) address, which it wants to use
Results
the MS is known in the corresponding GGSN (the GGSN knows the SGSN
where the MS is located) and data transmission with external data
network can begin
Section 1 Module 1 Page 66
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 66
1 Basics
1.31 Location management
MS enters in a new cell
New cell inside the current RA
MS in Ready state
New cell belongs to a new RA New cell belongs to a new LA
RA/LA update RA update Cell update
When the MS is in Ready State, it performs a Cell Update.
The MS sends any LLC frame in the new cell with its TLLI in the header.
The Cell and RAC information is added by the BSSGP at the programming of the BSSGP frame
RA Update:
The MS sends an RA Update Request message containing the identity of the MS, the old RAI and the
Update Type. The update type is either enter a new RA or periodical RA update.
The BSS adds the cell global Identity when transferring the message into a BSSGP frame towards the
SGSN.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 67
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 67
1 Basics
1.32 Routing Area
As total paging is more frequent with GPRS service together with
GSM paging, Routing Area (RA) was defined which may be smaller
than Location Area (LA)
One RA is a subset of one and only one LA
RAI (RA Identity) identifies several cells
The MS location in Standby state is known in the SGSN at the RA level
The MS is paged in its RA when MT traffic (MS in Standby State) arrives at
the SGSN
One RA is served by only one SGSN
Section 1 Module 1 Page 68
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 68
1 Basics
1.33 Network Mode of Operation (NMO)
- no Gs interface
- no MPDCH
CCCH CCCH
- no Gs interface
- MPDCH
PCCCH CCCH
III
- no Gs interface
- no MPDCH
CCCH CCCH
II
- Gs interface (not applicable) Packet data channel
- Gs interface
- no MPDCH
CCCH CCCH
I
- Gs interface
- MPDCH
PCCCH PCCCH
Characteristics
PS Paging
Channel
CS Paging
Channel
NMO
Paging Coordination
Since B7, all the possible combinations with the MPDCH are:
NMOIII,
NMOI with MPDCH.
According to the NMO offered and the packet mode of the MS (Packet Transfer Mode or Packet Idle
Mode), the routing of the PS paging and the CS paging changes.
The NMO setting is done from the OMC-R via the NETWORK_OPERATION_MODE parameter.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 69
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 69
1 Basics
1.34 TBF establishment
Several modes of TBF establishment in UL and DL exists:
In PIM mode
UL TBF on the CCCH or PCCCH (with primary MPDCH activation)
DL TBF on the CCCH or PCCCH (with primary MPDCH activation)
In PTM mode
UL TBF establishment during a DL TBF on the uplink PACCH
DL TBF establishment during a UL TBF on the downlink PACCH
The TBF establishment is performed through two types of access requests:
One phase access request
Two phase access request
B8/B9: The BSS preferentially establishes an EGPRS TBF to an EGPRS MS
provided that an EGPRS Packet Channel request message has been
received and that there are EGRPS resources (i.e. radio resources supported
by an EGPRS capable TRX) available in the cell, otherwise a GPRS TBF will
be established
Section 1 Module 1 Page 70
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 70
1 Basics
1.35 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 1 phase access
MS is in PIM mode:
MS BTS BSC MFS
The MS
switches
on the
assigned
PDCH
TA calculation
RACH
Channel request + TA
Channel request
Resource
allocation
AGCH
Immediate assignment
Immediate assignment
TFI, USF, TAI, TA
Packet UL assignment, polling
TFI, USF, TAI
PACCH
Packet UL assignment
Packet control Ack
PACCH
Resource
activation
RLC data block (TLLI, TFI)
PACCH
Packet UL Ack/Nack
PDTCH
1
2
3
TLLI, TFI
Also PRACH Also PRACH
Also PAGCH Also PAGCH
(EGPRS Packet)
(E)GPRS mode
Section 1 Module 1 Page 71
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 71
1 Basics
1.35 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 1 phase access
1 allocation of only one PDCH because the multi slot capability of
the MS is not known
Even if the Packet EGPRS Channel Request provides the MS multislot
class, only one PDCH is allocated
2 sending of the Packet UL assignment in order to force the MS to
send an acknowledgement (polling mechanism)
3 contention resolution mechanism :
suppose two MS send a (EGPRS Packet) Channel Request at the same
time
each MS sends its TLLI (and TFI)
the TLLI is present in the acknowledgement from the MFS
the MS with the wrong TLLI is discarded
Section 1 Module 1 Page 72
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 72
1 Basics
1.36 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 2 phases access
MS is in PIM mode:
MS BTS BSC MFS
The MS
switches
on the
assigned
PDCHs
TA calculation
RACH
Channel request + TA
Channel request
Resource
allocation
AGCH
Immediate assignment
Immediate assignment
TBF starting time, TA
PACCH
Packet resource request
Resource
activation
Packet UL assignment
PACCH
Packet UL assignment, polling
Packet resource request
TFI, USFs, TAI, TLLI
PACCH
Packet control Ack
Packet control Ack
Single block
allocation
TLLI
RLC data block
PDTCH
Also PAGCH Also PAGCH
Also PRACH Also PRACH
(EGPRS Packet)
(E)GPRS mode
Section 1 Module 1 Page 73
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 73
1 Basics
1.36 UL TBF establishment on CCCH, 2 phases access [cont.]
2 phases access is necessary when the MS wants either to :
Use RLC unacknowledged mode
Give its multislot class
Give QoS parameters (Peak_Throughput_Class, Radio_Priority)
Main difference:
Packet Resource Request message
Section 1 Module 1 Page 74
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 74
1 Basics
1.37 DL TBF establishment on CCCH
MS is in PIM mode:
MS BTS BSC MFS
LLC PDU
Resource
allocation
Immediate assignment
TFI, TAI
Immediate assignment
PCH
Packet DL assignment, polling
TFI, TAI
PACCH
Packet DL assignment
PACCH
Packet control Ack
Packet control Ack
TA calculation
Timing Advance / Power control
PACCH
TA / PC
PDTCH
RLC data block
1 PDCH
allocated
4 access bursts
PDCH(s)
allocated
Also PPCH
Section 1 Module 1 Page 75
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 75
1 Basics
1.38 System information broadcasting on BCCH
The BCCH indicates if GPRS is supported in the cell:
SI3/4: GPRS supported or not
SI13 position on BCCH used for GPRS
SI3: RA_COLOUR (routing area color) field present if GPRS
supported
If GPRS is supported :
SI13 is broadcasted on the BCCH
SI13 broadcast instead of retransmission of SI 1
Note: do not confuse RA_COLOUR and RA Code. The former is used as a flag which has two uses for the
MS entering a new cell:
to know if the GPRS service is supported in the cell (RA_COLOUR has a value different from -1).
to trigger an RA update when the value of the RA_COLOUR changes. It is easy to monitor because it is
broadcast often.
The Routing Area Code is necessary for the RA update procedure (message content).
The SI13 takes the place of a few SI1 occurrences.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 76
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 76
1 Basics
1.38 System information broadcasting on BCCH [cont.]
SI 13 content (non exhaustive):
RAC: routing area code
NMO: network mode of operation
PAN_DEC, PAN_INC, PAN_MAX: radio link supervision
ALPHA: GPRS uplink power control
T_AVG_T, T_AVG_W: calculation of average levels
PC_MEAS_CHAN: level measurements on BCCH/PDCH
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER: packet cell re-selection mode
Access Burst Type : 8 bit or 11 bit access burst
EGPRS_PACKET_CHANNEL_REQUEST: EGPRS capable MS shall use EGPRS
PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST message for uplink TBF establishment on the
(P)RACH (En_EGPRS = True)
BEP_PERIOD: Bit error probability (BEP) filter averaging period
E
G
P
R
S

c
e
l
l
The MS has to get SI13 information on a regular basis:
each time the SI13 content is updated (PSI field = SI13_CHANGE_MARK set to 1).
every 30 seconds max (even if the TBF has to be interrupted).
Through 2 different ways: SI13 on the BCCH or PSI13 in a PACCH block.
The MS has always the time to switch on PSI13 in NMOIII and/or NMOI with a Master PDCH
because PBCCH blocks are always after a I or X TS within the 52 multi-frame.
Access Burst Type: it defines the access burst (8 bits or 11 bits) to be used on the PRACH, PTCCH and
the Packet Control Ack on a PACCH.
When the Master Channel is present in the cell, the System Information Type 13 message has different
contents from those described above. It mainly consists of:
The radio description of the Primary Master Channel (in terms of time slot number, training
sequence code and frequency parameters).
One GPRS Mobile Allocation (MA), if frequency hopping is used for GPRS. This is the GPRS MA of
the Primary Master Channel, if hopping. If the Primary Master Channel is not hopping, the MA
corresponds to the hopping TRX(s) used for GPRS, if any.
Three modes of cell reselection have been defined by the 3GPP Standard for GPRS MSs. These
Network Control (NC) modes, known as the NC0, NC1 and NC2, are shortly described below:
NC0: the GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection without sending measurement reports to
the network.
NC1: the GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection. Additionally it sends measurement
reports to the network.
NC2: the GPRS MS shall not perform autonomous cell reselection. It sends measurement reports
to the network. The network controls the cell reselection.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 77
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 77
1 Basics
1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH
Presence of a PBCCH (primary MPDCH) in the cell is indicated by a
PBCCH description in the SI13 message
Primary MPDCH presence is possible only in NMO I or in NMO III
Secondary MPDCHs presence are in indicated in PSI 2 message broadcast
on the PBCCH channel
All (E)GPRS MS monitor the PBCCH to receive the PACKET SYSTEM
INFORMATION messages (PSI)
Without PBCCH configured in the cell:
In PIM, MS receive SI13 sent on BCCH
In PTM, MS receive PSI 13 (=SI13) sent on PACCH
Not possible to indicate to a MS, GPRS re-selection parameters (C31 and
C32 criteria)
Cell Parameters
NMO, MS Timers, DRX info, RLS parameters, etc.
PRACH access control parameters
access burst type, access control class, etc.
PCCCH organization parameters
BS_PBCCH_BKLS, BS_PAGCH_BLKS_RES, BS_PRACH_BLKS
The GPRS cell adjacencies are the same for a MS in Packet Idle Mode as for a MS in Packet Transfer
Mode. The GPRS cell adjacencies are equal to CS cell adjacencies.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 78
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 78
1 Basics
1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH [cont.]
PSI 1 (sent also periodically in PTM on PACCH)
Cell and BSS parameters
PRACH access control parameters
Description of the configuration of the packet control channels
number of blocks per 52 multiframe
Power control parameters
PSI 2 (sent also periodically in PTM on PACCH)
Cell allocation
GPRS mobile allocation : HSN + list of frequencies
PCCCH description : list of TS and frequency configuration
Circuit-switched parameters
Cell Identification : CI, RAC, LAC, MNC, MCC
PSI3, PSI3bis:
One PSI3 instance shall be sent and, as a minimum, one PSI3bis instance shall be sent as well
There may be up to 16 PSI3bis instances.
Reselection parameters: C31_HYST, C32_HYST, GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYST, PRIORITY_CLASS,
HCS_THR, RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Neighbor cell parameters: BSIC, BCCH frequency, SI13 PBCCH location, GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN,
GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH, GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET, GPRS_PENALTY_TIME,
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET.
Up to 32 neighboring cells may be defined. The field Same_RA_As_Serving_Cell provides
complementary information for reselection process.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 79
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 79
1 Basics
1.39 System information broadcasting on PBCCH [cont.]
PSI 3 / 3bis
BA(GPRS) list (identical to GSM BA list, neighboring cells BCCH)
Cell selection and re-selection parameters for (non-)serving cells
LSA identification of serving and neighboring cells
PSI 8 CBCH information (TS, freq., if there is CBCH in the cell)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 80
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 80
1 Basics
1.40 (E)GPRS Transmission Aspects
One Abis link is made of 31 64 kb/s timeslots
A 16 kb/s transmission channel is called a nibble
One timeslot is made of 4 nibbles
A transmission channel established for carrying (E)GPRS traffic is called a
GCH (GPRS channel). One GCH uses one Abis nibble and one Ater nibble
Two main types of Abis nibbles:
Basic nibbles
Carry CS traffic
Carry PS traffic but only coded with (M)CS-1 or (M)CS-2
Located on Primary Abis
Extra nibbles
Come from additional Abis timeslots for support of high speed packet traffic
Carry PS traffic only
Located on Primary or Secondary Abis
!!! MODIFIED FOR B9 !!!
Section 1 Module 1 Page 81
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 81
1 Basics
1.40 TRX Classes Concept
To support high data throughputs, Alcatel has developed a solution,
which aims at providing the best trade-off between offered radio
throughput and impact on the telecom resource consumption
This solution is based on the concept of multiple classes of TRX,
which support more or less data throughput. The higher the packet
class, the higher the maximum data throughput, the higher the
impact on BSS Telecom resources
Five TRX classes (1 to 5) have been defined
The Operator defines per cell the number of TRXs of each class
Section 1 Module 1 Page 82
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 82
1 Basics
1.40 TRX Classes Concept [cont.]
TRX
Packet Class
G3 or G4 TRX
Class 1
Simple
Class 2
Double
Class 3
Triple
Class 4
Quad
GPRS CS 1,2
EDGE MCS 1,2
GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5
GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5,6
GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
Supported (Modulation and) Coding schemes Supported (Modulation and) Coding schemes
Class 5
Quintuple
GPRS CS 1,2,3,4
EDGE MCS 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
Max 22 kbps
Max 30 kbps
Max 54 kbps
Max 59 kbps
Abis TS per TRX
2
4
6
8
10
Max 12 kbps
EGCH
An EGCH is made up of a pool of GCHs (from 1 to 5): One main GCH and a pool of auxiliary GCHs (the
GCH uses the basic 16k Abis nibble).
TRX class
The TRX class is defined at MFS level. For a TRX class n, the MFS will use n GCHs to establish one
EGCH. The TRX class varies with the hardware TRX capabilities (TRX type, Hardware PS capability).
Higher the TRX class is, higher the PDCH throughput is.
AterMux resources allocation
In case of EGCH establishment, from one to five AterMux nibbles will be necessary. Nibbles have not
to be contiguous.
These nibbles will be taken:
- on free nibbles of at least one already switched 64 Kbit/s channel, or,
- on free nibbles of one or more already switched 64 Kbit/s channels and on an additional 64 Kbit/s
channel, switched for this purpose, or,
- on 1 or 2 additional 64 Kbit/s channels, switched for this purpose.
When possible, the first possibility will be chosen.
When establishing a PDCH, the number of GCH links per radio time slot is determined according to
the TRX class, the PDCH type (SPDCH/MPDCH), and the AterMux congestion state.
Abis Interface
Several Abis nibbles are also used to handle a throughput higher than 16Kbit/s. Abis configuration is
static due to hardware constraints.
Depending on the requested throughput, a radio time slot needs up to 4 extra Abis nibbles in addition
to the basic one.
As all radio time slots of a TRX must have the same throughput capability, a TRX needs up to 8 extra
Abis time slots. These extra Abis time slots are called a TRX transmission pool.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 83
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 83
1 Basics
1.40 TRX Classes Concept [cont.]
Example 1: TRX class 1, up to CS-2 / MCS-2
Example 2: TRX class 4, up to CS-4 / MCS-8
Basic
Timeslots
TRX
Abis
TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
TS0 TS2 TS1 TS5 TS4 TS3 TS7 TS6
Basic
Timeslots
Abis
TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
TS1 TS2 TS3
TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7
Basic Nibble
Extra Nibbles
TS0
Timeslots
6 Extra
TRX
TS0 TS2 TS1
TS5 TS4 TS3 TS7 TS6
Radio Timeslot
1 PDCH = 4 terrestrial nibbles
= 1 basic nibble also used for voice
+ 3 additional nibbles used only for
packet traffic
Section 1 Module 1 Page 84
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 84
1 Basics
1.41 Two Abis Links per BTS
BSC
BTS
EVOLIUM
BTS
Primary Abis
Secondary Abis
Primary Abis
Secondary Abis
EVOLIUM
BTS
BTS
Topology 1
Topology 2
The secondary Abis is fully dedicated to packet data
Two topologies exists
Section 1 Module 1 Page 85
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 85
2 B9 features
Section 1 Module 1 Page 86
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 86
2 B9 features
2.1 Enhanced Packet Cell Reselection (R4 MSs)
In B9 a number of procedures have been introduced to achieve
better performances for GPRS cell reselections:
Packet PSI Status procedure
reducing the duration of the phase where the MS acquires PSI in the target cell
Packet SI Status procedure, same scope as above for SI in the target cell
Network Assisted Cell Change procedures
reducing, in NC0 and NC2 mode, the duration of the phase where the MS
acquires target cell (P)SI, in the serving cell
CCN mode procedure (Cell Change Notification)
allowing, in NC0 mode, the MS to indicate its wish to perform a cell reselection
Cell System Information distribution
Cell ranking with load criteria
Section 1 Module 1 Page 87
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 87
2 B9 features
2.1.1 Radio Network Impact
The B9 added improvements allow reducing the time dedicated to a
Cell Reselection in packet mode.
These sub-features impact traffic model, allowing faster CR to a
new cell or less number of CRs performed in a cell, will result in a
higher aggregated throughput in the cell.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 88
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 88
2 B9 features
2.2 Extended Uplink TBF Mode
This feature allows improving access time to the GPRS network
ping test down to 350 ms
It also improves the throughput in some cases.
The feature main benefits are: reduced (may be 0) delay before next UL transmission (no new TBF to establish) and
reduced DL TBF establishment, when it follows an UL TBF. Expected effects:
In uplink, it can avoid to re-establish TBF for subsequent burst of data from the same higher layer transaction,
and it avoids to establish a new TBF if new data arrive during countdown procedure on the current TBF.
In uplink, it can avoid to re-establish TBF for subsequent burst of data from the same higher layer transaction,
and it avoids to establish a new TBF if new data arrive during countdown procedure on the current TBF.
in downlink, it allows to perform more often the TBF establishment on concurrent TBF and it saves the DL
bandwidth by sending dummy UI commands (on the DL TBF is in delayed release state) if a concurrent TBF exists.
Both effects are expected to improve the end-to-end transmission delay and consequently to reduce the transfer
duration.
The mechanism proposed has the following characteristics:
Extended Uplink TBF shall be used whenever allowed by the MS capabilities.
The BSS shall be able to acquire the MS capability as fast as possible, using the Radio Access capability update
procedure (or information stored in other GPUs).
When the MS does not support the extended UL TBF mode , the BSS will use the normal release procedure, and
apply the delayed Final PUAN procedure if T_Delayed_final_PUAN is not 0.
If the MS capabilities are not yet known by the BSS at UL TBF establishment, the BSS shall be able to switch to
extended UL TBF mode if the MS capabilities are received before the release of the uplink TBF has been
initiated.
During the uplink TBF extension (i.e., after the last LLC frame has been received from the MS and no data is
being transmitted by the MS), it allows the network to initiate sending of data to the MS without performing a
downlink TBF establishment oncommon control channels.
It allows the MS to send data from newly arrived LLC frames after the countdown has started.
While in the delayed state the network must allocate some radio blocks, to allow the MS to restart the uplink
transfer whenever required by the application.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 89
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 89
2 B9 features
2.2 Radio Network Planning Impact
Traffic model changes: the feature will modify the number of UL TBF
activation+release on PACCH for all TCP/IP based applications and
WAP.
The feature will also modify the average duration of an uplink TBF,
and as a consequence increase the number of MS multiplexed in
uplink.
If necessary to reserve a certain bandwidth in uplink for QoS, then
the maximum number of MS in UL on the concerned PDCH should be
limited. (the current default value is of 5 MS multiplexed in uplink)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 90
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 90
2 B9 features
2.2 Radio Network Planning Impact [cont.]
Some parameters are to be handled in order to set up and configure
this feature:
EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF: Enable the extended TBF mode feature on the
uplink.
T_MAX EXTENDED_UL: Maximum duration of the extended uplink TBF
phase. Recommended rule: value between 1s and 2s.
EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED: Enable the transmission of USF every
20ms in extended mode, when the extended UL TBF feature is activated.
EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE: Enable the Radio Acces Capability update on Gb.
Recommended rule: should be enabled if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is
enabled and RA cap. update is supported by SGSN.
It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF
feature (flag EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting
feature (flag EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING).
Fast USF UL extended : to keep the link alive in order to be ready as soon as needed. If n MSs in extended,
then USF for 1 MS sent every n x 20ms.
RA CAP Update : the MFS can request the RA capabilities of the MS to the SGSN (based on IMSI)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 91
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 91
2 B9 features
2.3 Enhanced support of E-GPRS (EDGE) in uplink
In B9 support of MCS-5 to MCS-9 coding schemes in UL was
introduced.
59.2 kbit/s MCS-9 8-PSK B9
54.4 kbit/s MCS-8 8-PSK B9
44.8 kbit/s MCS-7 8-PSK B9
29.6 kbit/s MCS-6 8-PSK B9
22.4 kbit/s MCS-5 8-PSK B9
17.6 kbit/s MCS-4 GMSK B8
14.8 kbit/s MCS-3 GMSK B8
11.2 kbit/s MCS-2 GMSK B8
8.4 kbit/s MCS-1 GMSK B8
20.0 kbit/s CS-4 GMSK B8
14.4 kbit/s CS-3 GMSK B8
12.0 kbit/s CS-2 GMSK B8
8.0 kbit/s CS-1 GMSK B8
User data
rate
Coding
scheme
Modulation Release
Section 1 Module 1 Page 92
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 92
2 B9 features
2.3 Enhanced support of E-GPRS (EDGE) in uplink [cont.]
In B9 release, Incremental Redundancy may be activated for both
the DL and UL paths. Thanks to Incremental Redundancy, the link
adaptation procedure can be more aggressive: if the chosen MCS is a
bit too optimistic, IR increases the probability of data recovery and
increases data rates considerably specially in poorer radio conditions
for higher MCSs.
The link adaptation mechanism in UL is based on measurements
(MEAN_BEP, CV_BEP) done by the BTS on the radios blocks received
from the mobile. To take into account MCS-5 to MCS-9, the BSS
algorithm for link adaptation needs new link adaptation
MEAN_BEP/CV_BEP tables. These tables are the same as the one
already used for DL.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 93
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 93
2 B9 features
2.3.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
8-PSK in the UL should be considered in the planning tools for the
throughput and coverage estimation (based on interference
calculation). It impacts cell range estimates if the link-budget is UL
limited.
The IR gain should also be considered in the throughput estimation :
2 dB can be taken for the average IR gain.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 94
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 94
2 B9 features
2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9
Counter Improvements for Release B9 feature covers four
candidate sub-features for B9:
1. Support of distributions: It introduces a new concept of counters
called distributions to obtain improved statistics on (E)GPRS resource
usage.
2. Consolidation of cell indicators at GPU level: It allows an operator to
consolidate each indicator defined at cell level per GPU. This operation
is very useful to follow possible lacks of GCH or GPU resources in a
given GPU.
3. Counters defined at TRX level: It introduces a few counters defined at
TRX level to follow the radio and transmission resource usage.
4. New MFS counters: It consists in defining a few new counters to ease
the dimensioning and optimisation of (E)GPRS networks.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 95
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 95
2 B9 features
2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9 [cont.]
Support of distributions
Same rationale as P455b but for the DL direction DISTRIB_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC P455b
The distribution of the number of PDCH units assigned to an UL TBF is required to check whether
non-optimal allocations come from a lack of radio resources. In this case, parameters like
MAX_PDCH, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD can be increased.
DISTRIB_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC P455a
Same rationale as P454a but for the DL direction DISTRIB_DL_TBF_VOLUME P454b
The distribution of the UL LLC volume is interesting to:
-Differentiate the type of traffic (GMM signalling, Web browsing, FTP transfers, etc.).
-Check the validity of the UL LLC volumes (measured in bytes) reported by the PM counters. For
instance, the average is meaningless if long TBFs generating high UL LLC volumes are not
distinguished from short TBFs generating small UL LLC volumes.
-Justify certain bad throughputs observed in the fields.
-The corresponding thresholds should be tuneable to allow isolating a given traffic for a deep field
analysis.
DISTRIB_UL_TBF_VOLUME P454a
Same rationale as P453a but for the DL direction DISTRIB_DL_TBF_DURATION P453b
The distribution of the UL TBF duration is interesting to:
-Differentiate the type of traffic (GMM signalling, Web browsing, FTP transfers, etc.).
-Check the validity of the UL TBF duration reported by the PM counters. For instance, the average is
meaningless if long TBFs are not distinguished from short TBFs.
-Justify certain bad throughputs observed in the fields.
-The corresponding thresholds should be tuneable to allow isolating a given traffic for a deep field
analysis.
DISTRIB_UL_TBF_DURATION P453a
Rationale Mnemonic Counter
Support of distributions
Actually, Support of distributions is an enhancement for the feature Radio Measurement Statistics
(RMS), introduced on release B7.2, in order to get statistics on radio measurements such as RXLEV,
RXQUAL, interference level, timing advance, MS or BS transmitted power, etc.
This sub-feature introduces a new concept of counters to monitor PS resource usage. The existing PS
counters count a number of events occurring during the reporting period (i.e. every hour). However,
such counters do not allow retrieving the distribution of the events. For instance, existing counters
allow evaluating the averaged duration of the TBFs. However, it is interesting to know what is the
proportion of short TBFs compared to long TBFs, to evaluate the type of GPRS traffic, to understand
the throughput measured in the fields, etc.. New counters, called distribution, were introduced. The
B7.2 RMS feature is based on the following principles:
- The operator can launch RMS from the OMC-R on a per cell or per BSC basis for a given duration (up
to 23 hours).
- The radio measurements are monitored the closest to the observed functions, i.e. in the BTS.
- During the observation period, it is possible to launch extended measurement reporting in order to
get measurements on radio frequencies not used for CS/PS traffic in the cell.
The measurements are usually reported in vectors made of 10 values (or matrixes made of several
vectors). The ranges of each vector are defined by 9 thresholds. These thresholds are changeable at
the OMC-R.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 96
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 96
2 B9 features
2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9 [cont.]
Consolidation of cell indicators at GPU level
The sub-feature consists in allowing the operator to consolidate cell
counters P105c/d/e/f/g/h at GPU level.
Also, without this consolidation, it is up to the MFS to perform the
consolidation, which is in contradiction with the usual principles.
Indeed, it is not the role of the MFS to perform computation on
counters.
Cell Number of UL TBF establishment failures due to a lack of transmission resources. P105h
Cell Number of DL TBF establishment failures due to a lack of transmission resources. P105g
Cell Number of UL TBF establishment failures due to CPU processing power limitations of the
GPU.
P105f
Cell Number of DL TBF establishment failures due to CPU processing power limitations of the
GPU.
P105e
Cell Number of UL TBF establishment failures due to GPU congestion. P105d
Cell Number of DL TBF establishment failures due to GPU congestion. P105c
Instance Definition Reference
Section 1 Module 1 Page 97
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 97
2 B9 features
2.4 Counter Improvements for Release B9 [cont.]
New MFS counters
Same rationale as P98f but for the DL direction. NB_SUSP_DL_TBF_REL P98e
This counter is defined to obtain a more accurate
indicator for TBF drops. Operators are carefully analysing
the TBF drop rate that it is one of the main (E)GPRS QoS
figures.
NB_SUSP_UL_TBF_REL P98f
This counter is used to quantify the part of the GMM
signalling traffic over the whole (E)GPRS traffic. For
instance, this information is required to know how many
radio resources should be configured to carry only GMM
signalling traffic.
CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_DL_TBF_GMM_SIG_CELL P452
Same rationale as P451a but for the DL direction. CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_DL_TBF_CELL P451b
This counter is used with P38f to quantify the
overlapping of the UL TBFs on the PDCHs. For instance, a
high overlapping factor can explain why the throughputs
observed in the fields are low.
CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_UL_TBF_CELL P451a
Same rationale as P38f but for the DL direction. CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_USED_DL_CELL P38e
This counter is used with P451a to quantify the
overlapping of the UL TBFs on the PDCHs. For instance, a
high overlapping factor can explain why the throughputs
observed in the fields are low.
CUMULATED_TIME_PDCH_USED_UL_CELL P38f
Rationale Mnemonic Counter
Class B
Class B mobile phones can be attached to both GPRS and GSM services, using one service at a time. Class B
enables making or receiving a voice call, or sending/receiving an SMS during a GPRS connection. During voice
calls or SMS, GPRS services are suspended and then resumed automatically after the call or SMS session has
ended.
This is suspend / resume
Section 1 Module 1 Page 98
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 98
2 B9 features
2.4.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
The new counters and distributions should allow us to improve the
existing (E)GPRS traffic model (i.e. better accuracy of the model can
be achieved) but no impact on radio and other telecom
performances is expected.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 99
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 99
2 B9 features
2.5 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
The purpose of this feature is to give to the MFS all the radio
timeslots that are usable for PS traffic, according to the whole BSS
load (CS and PS loads). The MFS needs no more to request radio
timeslots to the BSC; instead the MFS is always aware of all the
available radio timeslots.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 100
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 100
2 B9 features
2.5 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation [cont.]
Main principles:
CS and PS allocation separation with expected result of higher mean TBF
throughputs.
To give to the MFS all the radio timeslots that are usable for PS traffic

MIN_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
reserved for PS priority for PS priority for CS reserved for CS
Max PS traffic when high CS traffic
Max PS traffic without CS traffic
Max CS traffic without PS traffic

MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT is computed by the BSC and defines the number of SPDCHs that are allocated to the
MFS (based on the whole BSS load)
The allocated SPDCHs are always those having the highest priority for PS allocations and their positions
are provided to the MFS within a new message called Radio Resource (RR) Allocation Indication message
TBFs allocated in the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone cannot be pre-empted (T1 re-allocation) when
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT value decreases
Periodically, the MFS sends to the BSC a Radio Resource Usage Indication message. This message
contains the allocated SPDCHs in the MFS as well as their usage. This message is used by the BSC to
estimate the PS load
If required, the MFS may pre-empt a few SPDCHs to give them back to the BSC. The MFS uses the same
Radio Resource Usage Indication message to indicate to the BSC the de-allocated SPDCHs and to
acknowledge the allocation of new SPDCHs
Reserved for PS: This zone defines the number of radio resources reserved for PS traffic. No CS traffic can
be carried in that zone. The size of this zone is defined by the parameter MIN_SPDCH.
Priority for PS: This zone defines a number of radio resources where CS and PS traffic can be carried, but
the preference is given to PS traffic in that zone. The size of this zone is defined by the parameters
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD and MIN_SPDCH.
Priority for CS: This zone defines a number of radio resources where CS and PS traffic can be carried, but
the preference is given to CS traffic in that zone. The size of this zone is given by the difference between the
parameters MAX_SPDCH and MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD.
Reserved for CS: This zone defines the number of radio resources reserved for CS traffic. No PS traffic can
be carried in that zone. The size of this zone is defined thanks to the parameter MAX_SPDCH.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 101
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 101
2 B9 features
2.5.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
-100 ms gain in the DL or UL TBF establishment duration
As the maximum number of radio resources is allocated to the MFS, the
TBF establishment duration (DL or UL) is reduced compared to the B8
solution (if the MFS requests for additional radio resources to establish
the TBF).
This could lead to an increase in the average TBF throughputs at cell
level.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 102
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 102
2 B9 features
2.6 2G/3G Inter-working
Improve the 3G neighborhood description in 2G cells
Consistent with the cell reselection strategy in B9
2G/3G Interoperability feature comprises two sub-features:
Improved 3G cell reselection
Neighbour UTRAN FDD cells are provided in SI2quater (new message)
UTRAN frequencies are defined at GSM cell level (3/cell at max)
Neighbour UTRAN FDD cells are described at the OMC with their UTRAN FDD
frequencies Scrambling Codes and Diversity
Load based 3G HO filtering
The BSS may reject an external HO incoming from the UTRAN, provided the HO
has not been triggered by an emergency cause
Current load will be compared with a new threshold, namely
THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
Section 1 Module 1 Page 103
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 103
2 B9 features
2.6 2G/3G Inter-working [cont.]
Improved 3G cell reselection
The B9 Improved 3G cell reselection feature allows the operator to
declare per 2G cell basis the 3G neighbor cells (the FDD UMTS frequencies
and the scrambling codes). Maximum 3 FDD UMTS frequencies may be
declared per cell basis. When knowing in advance the frequency and the
scrambling code of a 3G cell, an MS should require 10 to 20ms to
synchronize on that cell.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 104
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 104
2 B9 features
2.6 2G/3G Inter-working [cont.]
Load based 3G HO filtering
Regarding the current load, the BSS may reject an external hand-over
coming from the UTRAN, provided the hand-over has not been triggered
by an emergency cause, i.e. provided the hand-over request does not
carry a cause type uplink/downlink quality/strength.
Radio Network Planning Impact
These sub-features impact traffic model, allowing faster 2G-to-3G cell
reselection to a new cell or denying incoming handovers in a loded
condition. It will result in a higher aggregated throughput in the cell or in
less call drops experienced by a source 3G cell.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 105
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 105
2 B9 features
2.6.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
These sub-features impact traffic model, allowing faster 2G-to-3G
cell reselection to a new cell or denying incoming handovers in a
loaded condition. It will result in a higher aggregated throughput in
the cell or in less call drops experienced by a source 3G cell.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 106
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 106
2 B9 features
2.7 M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing
This feature provides a solution to share the Ater and Abis nibbles
between the radio timeslots of a TRX so that the transmission
resources left available by a PDCH can be re-used by other PDCHs
as long as those PDCHs belong to the same TRX. Thus allows
reducing the waste of transmission bandwidth on the Ater and Abis
interfaces.
Terminology
M-EGCH
- The term M-EGCH (Multiplexed-EGCH) is used to refer to a link established between the MFS and
the BTS. An M-EGCH is defined per TRX (instead of an EGCH per radio timeslot in release B8).
GCH
- A GCH is the 16kb/s channel between the MFS and the BTS. It is composed of an Ater nibble and an
Abis nibble cross-connected together in the BSC. The MFS or the BTS periodically send blocks on a
GCH every 20 ms.
GCH frame
- In 20 ms period (also called block period), a number of 320 bits of this GCH can be used: this is the
frame.
Segment
- A segment is formed by a part of an RLC block (after its segmentation on the M-EGCH link) and a
GCH header (different for first segment and subsequent segments). RLC data might be padded or a
segment can be a no-data segment.
- Note that in B9 a frame can be constituted of several segments belonging to different RLC blocks as
now all the RLC blocks sent on several PDCHs of a TRX are multiplexed on the same M-EGCH link.
Padding bits are added to the RLC blocks segments to fill the frame to 320 bits.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 107
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 107
2 B9 features
2.7 M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing [cont.]
The M-EGCH Statistical Multiplexing solution allows to share a given
number of GCHs at a TRX level, i.e between the radio timeslots of
one TRX, so that:
the transmission resource left available by one TBF mapped on a set of
RTS and being idle (eg, in establishment or delayed release phase) is
automatically reused by another TBF mapped on the same RTSs or on
another set of RTSs (as long as those sets of RTS are on the same TRX ).
an increase of MCS, i.e. of throughput experienced by one TBF, does not
lead to an increase of transmission links need since this increase can be
compensated by a decrease of MCS experienced by another TBF.
The GCH left while the control blocks are transferred can also be re-
used by other TBFs (which is not the case in B8); indeed control
blocks are encoded with CS1 and do not use an entire 320-bit frame.
The Statistical Multiplexing introduces a new segmentation of the radio blocks on the M-EGCH link: the blocks
of all the PDCHs of the TRX are sent one after the other without padding between them. As in B8 a block for a
PDCH can be spread over several 320-bit frames but after its last segment the block of another PDCH can be
started (if the remaining transmission capacity is sufficient). So a fixed 320-bit frame can have up to 2 or 3
segments of variable size. As in B8, the unused part of a 320bit frame (once all the PDCHs have been
scheduled) is filled with padding and the unused GCHs with a NODATA PDU.
The EGCH layer is highly impacted to support the statistical multiplexing and is renamed M-EGCH layer in
B9. This feature only applies to G3 and G4 TRX while the G2 DRFU TRX uses a B7.2 like GCH stack (1 GCH
allocated per PDCH to support up to CS2 TBFs).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 108
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 108
2 B9 features
2.7.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
Statistical multiplexing at M-EGCH layer does increase the BSS PS
capacity without running out of Abis/Ater resources.
Increase of BSC capacity in terms of # of TRXs allows :
higher PS throughputs
lower PS blocking/drop probabilities
Section 1 Module 1 Page 109
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 109
2 B9 features
2.8 Dynamic Abis allocation
This feature enables, on the Abis, to dynamically allocate nibbles
among the different TREs used for PS traffic in a given BTS.
Compared to B8, it allows a higher average Abis bandwidth per PDCH,
the BSC capacity in terms of TRXs is increased, and in some BTS
configurations it may avoid to deploy a second Abis link. The extra
Abis nibbles are shared at BTS level.
Radio Network Planning Impact
Increase of BSC capacity in terms of # of TRXs handled allows higher
PS throughputs and could lead to lower PS blocking/drop
probabilities.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 110
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 110
2 B9 features
2.8.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
Increase of BSC capacity in terms of # of TRXs handled allows higher
PS throughputs and could lead to lower PS blocking/drop
probabilities.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 111
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 111
2 B9 features
2.9 Enhanced transmission resource management
Deals with the determination of the number and of the nature of the
16k GCH channels inside each M-EGCH. It is implemented as a
transmission resource manager. The transmission resource manager
is located at MFS/GPU level. It handles both Abis and Ater resources
at GCH level.
It is in charge of:
Creating and removing the M-EGCH links
Selecting, adding, removing, and redistributing GCHs over the M-EGCH
links
Managing transmission resource preemptions
Managing Abis and/or Ater congestion states,
Optionally, monitoring M-EGCH links usage, according to the (M)CS
of their supported TBFs (UL and DL).
Abis nibbles sharing rules:
To ensure that, anytime, each cell of a given BTS would be able to support PS traffic, we should
guarantee a minimal number of Abis nibbles to every cell in the BTS. Consequently, it has been
decided that basic Abis nibbles are only shared at cell level (i.e. among TRXs of the same cell or
sector). This restriction prevents some cells from using the whole Abis nibbles of the BTS as a
given cell cannot use the basic Abis nibbles of another cell. However, Extra (and Bonus) Abis
nibbles are shared at BTS level.
Ater nibbles sharing rules:
A given amount of Ater transmission resource is allocated per GPU. Afterwards, this Ater
transmission resource is shared among the four DSPs of the GPU thanks to the GPU on-board Ater
switch.
Only 64K Ater TS are handled at GPU-level between DSPs. Thus, a 64K Ater TS may be moved
from one DSP to another if, and only if, all its four 16K Ater nibbles are free. This is the unique
restriction to Ater nibbles sharing at GPU-level.
Furthermore, to prevent the above restriction from disturbing the First GPRS traffic in a cell, an
Ater reserve shall always be available. The Ater reserve consists on one or several free 64K Ater
TSs and is defined per GPU. Every 64K TS of the Ater reserve may be connected to any DSP of the
GPU to fulfil GCH requests:
to establish the initial GCH in a cell with the Fast Initial GPRS Access feature activated, or;
to ensure the First GPRS traffic in a cell with no active initial GCH.
Each time a 64K TS is taken from the Ater reserve, a process is launched to retrieved another 64K
TS to replace it in the Ater reserve. This is done by means of GCH pre-emption on the Best effort
traffic supported by the GPU.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 112
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 112
2 B9 features
2.10 RMS_I1 Improvements
The goal of the feature is to monitor the usage of each allowed
AMR codecs (FR or HR), and to provide statistics information on
timing advance.
This feature allows monitoring the proper operation of AMR and the
quality of the radio coverage in a cell. It also gives the possibility to
tune the AMR parameters. Indeed, statistics about frame erasure
rate in uplink and comparison between codec distribution and RXLEV
allow assessing the voice quality, and adapting AMR thresholds to
the situation of a given cell.
RMS_I1 Indicators:
Mnemonic Definition Formula
RMS_AMR_FR_UL_BAD Number of bad speech frames using any
AMR FR codec in uplink
RMS44a
RMS_AMR_HR_UL_BAD Number of bad speech frames using any
AMR HR codec in uplink
RMS45a
RMS_AMR_FR_UL_RXLEV_UL Number of speech frames using one
AMR FR codec in uplink per Rxlev on
the uplink path
RMS46a
RMS_AMR_HR_UL_RXLEV_UL Number of speech frames using one
AMR HR codec in uplink per Rxlev on
the uplink path
RMS48a
RMS_AMR_FR_DL_RXLEV_DL Number of speech frames using one
AMR FR codec in downlink per Rxlev on
the downlink path
RMS47a
RMS_AMR_HR_DL_RXLEV_DL Number of speech frames using one
AMR HR codec in downlink per Rxlev on
the downlink path
RMS49a

Section 1 Module 1 Page 113
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 113
2 B9 features
2.10.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
Knowing which codecs are the most used, and comparing them with
link level in the cell, the operator could assess the voice quality and
possibly adapt the AMR parameters (definition of the subset,
thresholds and hysteresis).
These parameters are different for AMR FR and AMR HR, information
shall be provided separately for AMR FR and AMR HR.
The codecs used in UL and in DL can be different; therefore
interpretation of results would be easier if results are provided
separately for uplink and downlink.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 114
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 114
2 B9 features
2.11 RMS_I2 Improvements
The aim of this feature is to provide statistics information on
timing advance, in order to understand geographical traffic
distribution in a cell, to identify resurgences and hot spots.
The improvement RMS_I2: Timing advance is a good indicator
about the mobile position relative to a cell.
Its usage in RMS B7.2 is very limited: only measurement reports
done over a TA threshold are available, along with the max
measured TA. This information is not detailed enough to
understand geographical distribution in a cell, in order to identify
resurgences and hot spot.
RM_I2 Indicators:
Mnemonic Definition Formula
RMS_TPR_TIMING_ADVANCE The distribution of number of
measurement reports for which the value
of timing advance is in TA band
RMS50a
RMS_TPR_UL_RXLEV_TA_BAN
D
The average value of RXLEV per TA band
in uplink.
RMS51
RMS_TPR_DL_RXLEV_TA_BAN
D
The average value of RXLEV per TA band
in downlink.
RMS52
RMS_TPR_UL_RXQUAL_TA_BA
ND
The average value of RXQUAL per TA
band in uplink.
RMS53
RMS_TPR_DL_RXQUAL_TA_BA
ND
The average value of RXQUAL per TA
band in downlink.
RMS54

Section 1 Module 1 Page 115
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 115
2 B9 features
2.11.1 Radio Network Planning Impact
This RMS improvement described here would provide help to the
operator for optimization of his network planning, through
identification of these resurgences and hot spots. Detecting hot
spots can be very useful in order to re-design that part of the
network in a most adapted way to the experienced traffic load.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 116
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 116
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
Section 1 Module 1 Page 117
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 117
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.1 Cell Reselection Overview
In GSM, when an MS in idle mode
moves from cell A to cell B, it
performs a cell reselection applying
the C1 or C2 criteria. In dedicated
mode, MS performs a handover
For (E)GPRS, the MS does in GMM
READY state (PTM) cell reselection
In the old cell an abnormal TBF release
takes place
In the new cell the MS establishes a new
resource. (Different to handover in GSM,
where the new channel is reserved by the
network in advance)
RA B
RA A
selection
reselection
Cell 1
Cell 2
Cell 3
LA 1
LA 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 118
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 118
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.1 Cell Reselection Overview [cont.]
Three modes of cell reselection have been defined for a MS in GPRS
packet transfer mode:
NC0 mode: (E)GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection without
sending measurement reports to the network
NC1 mode: (E)GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection.
Additionally it sends measurement reports to the network
NC2 mode: (E)GPRS MS shall not perform autonomous cell reselection. It
sends measurement reports to the network. The network controls the
cell reselection
B9 release supports NC0 and NC2 modes
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER parameter defines whether the MS or the
BSS controls the cell reselections
NC0 mode: NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = 0
NC2 mode: NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = 3
Section 1 Module 1 Page 119
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 119
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.1 Cell Reselection Overview [cont.]
The attached (E)GPRS mobiles use different criteria, depending on whether
the PBCCH is present or not in the serving cell
No PBCCH in the serving cell:
GMM standby:
Only NC0 mode is applied. Cell reselection is identical to the basic GSM cell reselection in idle mode.
C1 and C2 criteria are used
GMM ready:
NC2 mode is applied if set by the Operator. C1
NC2
, C2
NC2
criteria are used
NC0 mode is applied if NC2 mode is not set and consequently C1, C31 and C32 criteria are used
PBCCH established in the serving cell:
GMM standby:
Only NC0 mode is applied. C1, C31 and C32 criteria are used
GMM ready:
NC2 mode is applied if set by the Operator. C1
NC2
, C31
NC2
and C32
NC2
criteria are used
NC0 mode is applied if NC2 mode is not set and consequently C1, C31 and C32 criteria are used
In GSM
C1 = A - Max (0,B) with:
- A = RLA_C - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
- B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - MS_TXPWR_MAX + POWER_OFFSET(1800)
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T) when Penalty_time<31
C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET when Penalty_Time=31
In GPRS ready and standby states, cell reselection is performed by the MS except for a class A MS while
in dedicated mode of a circuit switched connection, in which case the cell is determined by the
network according to the handover procedures.
For a class B MS which can combine GSM and GPRS states, C1 criterion is used when the MS
simultaneously attached to both, the network and the MS is in Packet Idle Mode (refer to GSM 05.08).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 120
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 120
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.1 Cell Reselection Overview [cont.]
Independent from the presence of the PBCCH
The GPRS cell adjacencies
are the same in packet idle mode as in packet transfer mode
are set equal to the CS cell adjacencies (i.e. the BA(GPRS)=BA(BCCH) list )
Recommendation is to enable the GPRS service on all cells in order to
prevent a MS to reselect a cell without GPRS support
Section 1 Module 1 Page 121
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 121
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.2 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, no PBCCH established
The same procedure as in GSM, with the following criteria applied:
C1: the pathloss criterion, for cell selection and reselection
C2: for cell reselection
C1 criterion: the path loss criterion is satisfied if C1 > 0
C1 = A - Max(B,0)
A = RLA_C - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P
RLA_C = Received Level Average for CS service
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN = Minimum received signal level at the MS
required for access to the system
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH = Maximum TX power level an MS may use
when accessing the system
P = Maximum RF output power of the MS
The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighboring cell.
In the above equations, the following notations mean:
AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) is the average received signal level measured by the MS on the BCCH of the cell n.
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n) or GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n) is the minimum received signal level required
to perform an access to the cell n.
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) or GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) is the maximum transmit power of the MS
when accessing the cell n.
P(n) is the maximum output RF power of the MS in the BCCH frequency band of the cell n. P(n) gives
the MS Radio Access Capability Information Element provided in the Packet Resource Request message
or in the DL LLC PDU. In the NC cell reselection procedure, the parameter P(n) shall always refer to the
RF power capability of the GMSK modulation.
Note that all values are expressed in dBm.
The cell ranking criterion parameter C2NC2 is used to order the candidate cells on an radio criterion.
This criterion applies only in serving cells where there is no PBCCH established.
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n) is a positive offset which favors or disfavors the cell n.
PENALTY_TIME(n) indicates whether the cell reselection offset shall be positive or negative.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 122
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 122
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.2 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, no PBCCH established [cont.]
C2 criterion:
PENALTY_TIME <> 11111
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY OFFSET * *
H(PENALTY_TIME - T)
non-serving cells: H(x) = 0 for x < 0; H(x)= 1 for x 0
serving cells: H(x) = 0
T is a timer implemented for each cell in the list of strongest carriers. T shall be started
from zero at the time the cell is placed by the MS on the list of strongest carriers
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET may be used to give different priorities to different bands when
multiband operation is used
TEMPORARY_OFFSET applies a negative offset to C2 for the duration of PENALTY_TIME
after the timer T has started for that cell.
PENALTY_TIME = 11111
C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
If CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND = 0 then C2 = C1
Section 1 Module 1 Page 123
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 123
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established
The following criteria are applied for cell reselection:
C1: when C1< 0
C31, C32: when a non-serving cell is evaluated to be better than the
serving cell
C1: the pathloss criterion
Is used as a minimum signal level criterion for cell reselection for GPRS
in the same way as for GSM Idle mode criterion
Same as defined, but with specific GPRS parameters:
C1 = A - Max(B,0)
A = RLA_P - GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
B = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P
GPRS specific parameters, are broadcast on PBCCH of the serving cell
Section 1 Module 1 Page 124
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 124
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]
C31: the signal level threshold criterion parameter for hierarchical
cell structures (HCS)
Is used to determine whether prioritized hierarchical GPRS and LSA cell
re-selection shall apply
For cells that fulfill C31criteria (C31>0):
The best cell is the cell with the highest C32 value, among those cells that
have the highest priority class, among those cells that have highest LSA priority
If no cell fulfils the C31 criterion:
The best cell is the cell with the highest C32 value, among all the neighbor
cells
C32: cell ranking criterion parameter is used to select cells among
those with the same priority class
The signal level threshold criterion parameter C31
NC2
is used in hierarchical cellular networks to
determine whether the signal level received from a neighboring cell n is sufficient to redirect the MS
towards cell n based on a non-radio priority criterion. This criterion parameter is used only if there is a
PBCCH established in the serving cell. HCS_THR(n) defines a signal threshold for applying the
prioritized hierarchical GPRS cell reselection criterion. The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a
neighboring cell. Contrary to the C31 criterion implemented in the MS, the Alcatel BSS does not
manage the timer T implemented for each cell to monitor the time a neighboring cell is present in the
list of the strongest carriers. Therefore, the Alcatel BSS always assumes that
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n) = 0. As the GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS,
RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS, and C31_HYST are used to control the triggering conditions of a cell
reselection, they are not taken into account in the criterion C31
NC2
and C32
NC2
parameters.
The cell ranking criterion parameter C32
NC2
is used to order the candidate cells on an radio criterion.
This criterion applies only in serving cells where there is a PBCCH established.
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n) applies a positive or negative offset which favors or disfavors the
neighboring cell n. The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighboring cell. If the parameter
C32_QUAL is set, the determination of C32
NC2
is modified so that the neighboring cell n having the
highest AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 among all the neighboring cells is applied a GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET
(only if the offset is positive) and no GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET is applied to the other neighboring
cells.
The MFS shall take care of avoiding ping-pong effects between the old cell and the new cell (i.e.,
circular NC cell reselections). For that purpose, the MFS handles an anti-ping-pong timer and an anti
ping-pong offset, respectively called T_NC_PING_PONG and NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET. While the timer
T_NC_PING_PONG is running the neighboring cells are disfavored by the offset NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
(expressed in dB) in the cell ranking process.
The MFS starts the anti-ping-pong timer at the creation of the NC2 context for the MS.
The MFS stops the anti ping-pong timer at the deletion of the NC2 context.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 125
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 125
C31 criterion
Serving cell:
C31(s) = RLA_P(s) GPRS_HCS_THR(s)
Neighbor cell:
C31(n) =
RLA_P is the received level average for PS service (i.e. C value)
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
<>
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
=
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)
T(n) <= GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)
= RLA_P(n) GPRS_HCS_THR(n)
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
= RLA_P(n) - GPRS_HCS_THR(n)
T(n) > GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n) = RLA_P(n) - GPRS_HCS_THR(n) = RLA_P(n) - GPRS_HCS_THR(n)

Section 1 Module 1 Page 126
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 126
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]
The following parameters are broadcast on PBCCH of the serving
cell:
GPRS_HCS_THR is the signal threshold for applying HCS GPRS and LSA re-
selection
Min: -110 dBm; Max: -48 dBm; Default: -84 dBm
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS is the HCS priority of the cell
Min: 0 (lowest); Max: 7 (highest); Default: 0
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME is the time during which the
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET is active in neighbour cells
Min: 10s; Max: 320s ; Default: 10s
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET applies a negative offset to C31/C32 for the
duration of GPRS_PENALTY_TIME after the timer T has started for that
cell
Min: 0; Max: infinity (coded 7); Default: 0
Section 1 Module 1 Page 127
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 127
C32 criterion
Serving Cell:
C32(s) = C1(s)
Neighbor cell:
C32(n) =
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET is used to apply an permanent offset for GPRS cell
reselection in neighbor cells
Min: -52 dBm; Max: +48 dBm; Default: 4 dBm
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]

GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
<>
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
=
GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(s)
T(n) <= GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)
= C1(n) +
GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)
= C1(n) +
GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n) -
GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
T(n) > GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)
= C1(n) +
GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)
= C1(n) +
GPRS_ RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)

C1 is the same as in GSM except that
A = RLA_P GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: listening capacity of MS in the cell
B = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P: talking capacity of MS in the cell
C1 shall be positive and as high as possible
C32:
if C32_QUAL=1, positive GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET value shall only be applied to the
neighboring cell with the highest RLA_P value of those cells for which C32 is compared above.
If GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET (neighbor) >0, the cell has a bonus to reselection
If GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET (neighbor) <0, the cell has a handicap for reselection
In Packet Idle Mode, the MS shall make one measurement for each BCCH carrier monitored every 4
seconds, as well as more than one sample per second for each BCCH carrier.
A list of 6 strongest cells shall be kept updated at a rate of at least one update per running average
period.
In Packet Transfer Mode, the MS shall monitor a list of 6 strongest non-serving cell BCCH carriers. It
shall attempt to check the BSIC for each of these 6 strongest cells at least once every 10 seconds.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 128
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 128
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]
C32 is an improvement of C2. It applies an individual offset and
hysteresis value to each pair of cells, as well as the same temporary
offsets as for C2.
Additional hysteresis values apply for a cell re-selection that requires
cell or routing area update
With C32, neighbor cells can be favored through the
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n) broadcast on the PBCCH. This allows
favoring neighbor cells e.g. based on their frequency band
C32 also gives the possibility to temporarily penalize neighbor cells
having the same priority as the serving cell (contrary to C31 that
penalizes cells of different priorities). The penalty is computed
based on the GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n) and
GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n) parameters, like for C31
Section 1 Module 1 Page 129
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 129
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.3 Cell reselection: NC0 mode, PBCCH established [cont.]
If cell B is belonging to another Routing Area (RA) than cell A, the
MS has to make RA update
additional hysteresis are applied to avoid unnecessary RA updates:
CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS hysteresis for cell reselection applied on C1
criterion (no PBCCH), when the new cell is in a different LA or, for a GPRS MS,
in a different RA, or when a GPRS MS is in GMM ready state
RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS indicates in both STANDBY and READY state the
additional hysteresis which applies on C31 and C32 (with PBCCH) when
selecting a cell in a new RA
C31_HYST: Determines whether an additional cell hysteresis shall be
applied to the C31 criterion in same RA, in READY state
GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS additional hysteresis
Section 1 Module 1 Page 130
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 130
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.4 Cell reselection execution: NC0 in PTM
THERE ARE NO HANDOVERS IN GPRS
The MS is performing now Cell Reselection during a TBF
it leaves the coverage area of the cell or enters in a building
if a neighbor cell is better (from C Criterion point of view), the MS
performs a cell re-selection abnormal TBF release happens
in the new cell, a new TBF is automatically established, after (P)SI
information acquisition
only the remaining data from the old TBF will be sent then
automatically
Coding scheme adaptation is active in parallel and independently
triggered
Section 1 Module 1 Page 131
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 131
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.4 Cell reselection execution: NC0 in PTM [cont.]
CS 1
CS 2
Throughput
[kbit/s]
Time
[s]
t1 t2 t3 t5 t4 t0
Average
Throughput
Throughput
TBF 1 (Cell 1) TBF 2 (Cell 2)
Data Call Duration
1. CS change
1. CS change
Cell
Re-Selection
Typical GPRS data transmission with cell reselection
Section 1 Module 1 Page 132
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 132
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode
In NC2 mode of operation, the BSS controls the cell reselections of
all MS when in packet transfer mode (PTM) or of all MS when in GMM
Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode)
While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS sends
packet measurements reports (PMR) to the BSS
Aim: NC2 mode is to limit the number of reselections to the strict
necessary ones increased data throughput
Alcatel NC2 implementation allows to favor GPRS traffic inside GPRS
preferred cells (GPRS redirection)
Particular layer (e.g. macro)
Particular frequency band (e.g. GSM 900)
reduced impact on signaling load
Each time the MS performs a cell reselection, the data transfer is interrupted and a retransmission of
some LLC PDUs may be required:
The on-going TBF is released in the old cell.
The MS performs the PSI or SI acquisition in the new cell.
Then, the MS establishes a new UL TBF in this cell to send a Cell Update message to the SGSN.
The MFS deletes or reroutes towards the new cell the LLC PDUs stored in the old cell.
- if they are deleted, a retransmission is needed.
Finally, the data transfer is re-started (after a DL TBF establishment, in case of DL transfer).
All these steps degrade the data throughput or the page access time perceived by the enduser.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 133
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 133
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
NC2 activation
An MS transit to NC2 mode when it receives a PACKET MEASUREMENT
ORDER message from the BSS, at the beginning of a data transfer. It
provides mainly the NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T which is the reporting
period of NC measurements sent by the MS while in PTM (default = 0.96s)
Measurement reporting and processing
MS periodically reports its NC2 measurements on PACCH through a
PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT
The BSS handles the following measurements:
UL serving cell: RXQUAL for GPRS TBF and mean BEP for EGPRS TBF
DL serving cell: RXQUAL for GPRS TBF and mean BEP for EGPRS TBF
DL serving and neighbor cells: RXLEV measurements of BCCH
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is a cell parameter tunable at the OMC-R.
The R97 and R98 MSs are differentiated from the other MSs. Indeed, all the MSs shall support the NC2
mode, however since no network manufacturer has implemented the NC2 mode, the R97 and R98 MSs
may not have been sufficiently tested and therefore there is a risk of interoperability with these MSs.
The Packet Measurement Order message is used to activate and de-activate the NC2 mode of
operation for a given MS.
Activation
- The Packet Measurement Order (NC2) message is sent when:
establishing the first Downlink TBF of the Packet Transfer Mode or when re-establishing
the DL TBF while T3192 is running and there is not any on-going UL TBF.
no measurement report has already been received for that MS during its on-going packet
transfer(s) (UL and/or DL).
the MS has not been forced to operate in NC2 mode by a Packet Cell Change Order
message (during an intra-RA cell reselection).
De-activation
- The Packet Measurement Order (RESET) message is sent at the end of the data transfer, in
case of NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE = NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer.
- When the MS goes back to the STANDBY state, in case of NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE = NC2
deactivation at GMM Ready timer expiry.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 134
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 134
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
Cell reselection detection
NC2 reselection are triggered only for EMERGENCY or for POWER BUDGET
causes:
Cause PT 1: Too low DL received signal level
Cause PT 2: Detection of a better cell
Cause PT 3: Too bad DL radio quality
Cause PT 4: Too bad UL radio quality
The criteria calculated by the BSS in NC2 mode are very near from those
used by the MS in NC0 mode. This ensures that the target cell selected
by the MS in NC0 mode or by the BSS in NC2 mode are identical in quite
all cases
C1
NC2
, C2
NC2
, C31
NC2
and C32
NC2
criteria are calculated by the BSS and the
parameters defined for cell reselections in NC0 are re-used
Section 1 Module 1 Page 135
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 135
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
Cause PT1: Too low DL received signal level
AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 < NC_DL_RXLEV_THR + Max(B
NC2
,0)
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR = -110 dBm (Never) deactivates Cause PT1
Cause PT1 is equivalent to check the condition C1
NC2
< 0 assuming that the
(GPRS_)RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN threshold is replaced by NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
threshold
C1
NC2
: Pathloss Criterion parameter
C1
NC2
(n) = A
NC2
(n) max(B
NC2
(n),0)
No PBCCH
A
NC2
(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
B
NC2
(n) = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) P(n)
PBCCH established
A
NC2
(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
B
NC2
(n) = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) P(n)
The cause PT1 is equivalent to check the condition C1
NC2
< 0 assuming that the (GPRS_)RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
threshold is replaced with NC_DL_RXLEV_THR threshold.
Max (Bnc2,0) = handicap on threshold if MS can't reach max UL tx power recommended in the cell
Section 1 Module 1 Page 136
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 136
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
Cause PT2: Detection of a better neighbor cell
AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
and
{
No PBCCH:
C2
NC2
(n) > C2
NC2
(s) + NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (s,n)
PBCCH established:
C32
NC2
(n) > C32
NC2
(s) + NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (s,n)
}
NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (s,n) defined per cell adjacency link
NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR = -110 dBm (Never) disables Cause PT2
The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighbor cell
Cause PT2 is checked among the neighboring cells n upon receipt of a Packet Measurement Report message. It
is triggered if the value C2
NC2
or C32
NC2
of one neighboring cell n exceeds the value C2
NC2
or C32
NC2
of the
serving cell s by at least the O&M hysteresis NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(s,n) defined per cell adjacency link
(respectively whether or not there is a PBCCH in the serving cell).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 137
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 137
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
C2
NC2
: Cell ranking criterion parameter
used to order the candidate cells on a radio criterion and applies only in
serving cells where there is no PBCCH established
PENALTY_TIME(n) <> 11111:
C2
NC2
(n) = C1
NC2
(n) + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)
PENALTY_TIME(n) = 11111:
C2
NC2
(n) = C1
NC2
(n) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)
CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n) is a positive offset which favors or disfavors the
cell n
PENALTY_TIME(n) indicates whether the cell reselection offset shall be positive
or negative
The n denotes either the serving cell or a neighbor cell
Same parameter as GSM Reselection
"11111" = value 31 (or infinity)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 138
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 138
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
C31
NC2
: signal level threshold criterion parameter
Used in hierarchical networks to determine whether the signal level
received from a neighbor cell n is sufficient to redirect the MS towards
cell n based on a non-radio priority criterion
Used only if there is a PBCCH established in the serving cell
C31
NC2
(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) HCS_THR(n)
HCS_THR(n) defines a signal threshold for applying the prioritized hierarchical
GPRS cell reselection criterion
The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighbor cell
Section 1 Module 1 Page 139
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 139
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
C32
NC2
: cell ranking criterion parameter
Used to order the candidate cells on a radio criterion
Applies only in serving cells where there is a PBCCH established
Cell n is the serving cell:
C32
NC2
(n) = C1
NC2
(n)
Cell n is a neighbor cell:
C32
NC2
(n) = C1
NC2
(n) + GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)
GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET(n) applies an positive or negative offset which favors
or disfavors the neighbor cell n. Cell n denotes either the serving cell or a
neighbor cell
Section 1 Module 1 Page 140
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 140
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
Cause PT3: Too bad downlink radio quality
AV_DL_RXQUAL_NC2 > NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR: threshold above which Cause PT3 is triggered due to a
too bad RXQUAL in DL (while the MS is in PTM)
Min: 0; Max: 7; Default: 7; step size: 0.1
NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 (Never) deactivates Cause PT3
Cause PT4: Too bad uplink radio quality
AV_UL_RXQUAL_NC2 > NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR: threshold above which Cause PT4 is triggered due to a
too bad RXQUAL in UL (while the MS is in PTM)
Min: 0; Max: 7; Default: 7; step size: 0.1
NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 (Never) deactivates Cause PT4
Cause PT4
is checked only for the serving cell whenever one UL RLC data block is correctly received for the on-
going UL TBF provided that T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID seconds have elapsed since the computation of the
first UL samples of the UL TBF.
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID aims at not triggering false alarms at the beginning of the TBF and not
triggering an NC cell reselection for a very short TBF.
Cause PT3
is checked only for the serving cell each time a (EGPRS) Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message is
received provided that the DL TBF is not in delayed release state and provided that the
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID seconds have elapsed since the receipt of the first Packet Downlink Ack/Nack
message of the DL TBF.
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID aims at not triggering false alarms at the beginning of the TBF and not
triggering an NC cell reselection for a very short TBF.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 141
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 141
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
Candidate cell evaluation
Cell Filtering: this process removes from the list candidates the cells to
which a previous NC2 cell reselection failed
Cell Ranking:
No PBCCH
The cell are ranked to their C2
NC2
value. The best cell candidate is the cell having the
highest C2
NC2
value
PBCCH established
The cell are ranked based on the C31
NC2
and C32
NC2
criteria. Among the cells, the best
cell is the cell with the highest C32
NC2
value among:
o For cells that fulfill C31
NC2
criterion (C31
NC2
>0):
Those cells having the highest PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
o If no cell fulfill C31
NC2
criterion:
All cells
Section 1 Module 1 Page 142
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 142
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.5 Cell reselection: NC2 mode [cont.]
Cell reselection execution
The network triggers the cell reselection by sending a PACKET CELL CHANGE ORDER message
NC2 deactivation
Two modes via the O&M parameter NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE:
NC2 deactivation at the end of packet date transfer
NC2 deactivation at Ready timer expiry
On-going data transfer (1)
MS Cell A
Packet Measurement Report (2)
Cell B
SGSN
(3)
Packet Cell Change Order (4)
UL LLC PDU (8)
UL TBFestablishment (7)
Flush-LL PDU(9)
Flush-LL-Ack PDU (10)
(6)
Packet Control Ack. (5)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 143
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 143
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.6 GPRS redirection
Thanks to NC2 activation for MS in PTM
B8/B9 release GPRS redirection is actually a NC cell reselection that
is triggered at the beginning of the PTM in the serving cell even if
the radio link is good
Redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry PS
traffic
The operator may wish to favor GPRS traffic in a particular
layer/band:
MULTILAYER NETWORK, it may be more efficient to define GPRS
resources in the UPPER LAYER only
Reduce the number of cell reselections
Microcells have smaller traffic capacity and is assigned to CS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 144
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 144
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.6 GPRS redirection [cont.]
MULTIBAND NETWORK, it may be more efficient to favor GPRS
traffic in the 900 MHz band, due to its better indoor penetration
MS GPRS mainly used in indoor environment
Gain in stability of the GPRS session
Operator must tune the NC parameters so that a NC cell reselection
is systematically triggered at the beginning of a data transfer on
receipt of the first Packet Measurement Report
E.g. NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can be always activated by setting
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR = - 47 dBm (Always)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 145
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 145
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.7 GPRS Power Control: Overview
GPRS power control is only implemented in uplink in open loop
configuration
GSM recommendation 05.08
During open loop power control, the MS adapts its output power in
UL per block (i.e. 4 timeslots), based on the measured average
signal strength in DL
Open loop:
There is no indication by the BTS whether the output power was
sufficiently low or high: the same path loss in UL and DL is assumed by
the MS
When accessing the network on the (P)RACH the MS uses the output
power defined by (GPRS_)MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH, which is
broadcasted on the (P)BCCH
Section 1 Module 1 Page 146
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 146
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements
MS (E)GPRS performs the necessary LEVEL measurements for power
control algorithm, either on the BCCH of the serving cell or on the
PDCH (carrying the PACCH):
The choice is made according to PC_MEAS_CHAN parameter, which is
broadcasted on the BCCH:
PC_MEAS_CHAN = 1, measurements on PDCH (default)
24 measurements in 480 ms
PC_MEAS_CHAN = 0, measurements on BCCH
12 measurements in 480 ms
The LEVEL measurements are averaged with recursive filtering
algorithms
The average levels are calculated by the MS in PIM and PTM modes,
thus proper average level available at transfer start
Section 1 Module 1 Page 147
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 147
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements [cont.]
Averaging
Recursive Filtering (in the MS) to obtain average level
Recursive Filtering Formula:
C
n
=a
*
SS
n
+ (1-a)
*
C
n
-1
C
n
is the DL level average calculated by the MS (C
n-1
=previous value)
SS
n
is mean of received signal level of 4 bursts
a is the forgetting factor
Packet Idle Mode
a = 1 / [min (n, max (5,T_AVG_W/T
DRX
) ) ]
T
DRX
= parameter which considers the number of measurements that are made
and the paging group; T
DRX
=BS_PA_MFRMS
BS_PA_MFRMS = number of multiframes needed to send all paging groups
T_AVG_W = 2
k/2
/6 (k=1..25, recommended k < 12) is the signal level filter
period for PC in PIM
Section 1 Module 1 Page 148
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 148
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements [cont.]
[7-10] 9 16
[7-10] 9 14
[6-10] 9 12
[6-10] 9 10
[6-10] 8 8
[6-10] 8 6
[5-9] 7 4
[1-7] 4 2
Range to
investigate
Default value of k
GSM averaging window size
(A_LEV_PC)
Packet transfer Mode
a = 1/[6* T_AVG_T] on BCCH
a = 1/[12* T_AVG_T] on PDCH
T_AVG_T= 2
k/2
/6 signal level filter period for PC in PTM
k for T_AVG_T for measurements on BCCH or on PDCH:
Section 1 Module 1 Page 149
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 149
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.8 GPRS Power Control: Measurements [cont.]

20
25
30
35
40
45
50
1 6 11 16 21 26 31 36 41 46 51 56 61 66 71 76 81 86 91 96 101 106 111 116 121 126 131 136 141
RXLEV_DL GSM average practical GPRS average
Averaging
Tuning of k: average mechanism convergent between GSM and GPRS
Comparison between GSM averaging and the practical GPRS averaging with
A_LEV_PC=2 and K =4:
Section 1 Module 1 Page 150
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 150
Each block is transmitted by the MS with the output power P
CH
:
P
CH
=min (
0
-
CH
-
*
(C+48), (GPRS)MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH))

0
: is the maximum classmark power of the MS
= 39 dBm in GSM 900/850/400
= 36 dBm in GSM 1800/1900

CH
: is sent to the MS. This parameter is used for grading the power
control to a target received level at the BTS side
Min:0; Max: 62; Default: 30 dB in GSM 900, 24 dB in GSM 1800
: is send to the MS. This parameter can be described as a reactivity
factor. The 05.08 GSM recommendation suggest to use = 1 in order to
have an open loop power control
C : is the DL level average calculated by the MS
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm
Section 1 Module 1 Page 151
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 151
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm [cont.]
Tuning of
CH
and
Idea: Tune PC algorithm to balance DL and UL paths

= 1 (according to GSM 05.08)

CH
tune
CH
in order to reach the Minimum UL Level (RXLEV
UL
) at the BTS

CH
=
0
- 48 - RXLEV
UL
- P
BTS
Balanced DL and UL paths:
P
MS
- RXLEV
UL
= P
BTS
RXLEV
DL
P
BTS
: BTS power; P
MS
: MS power
RXLEV
UL
: Received level at BTS side
RXLEV
DL
: Received level at MS side (C value in the PC formula)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 152
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 152
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.9 GPRS Power Control: Algorithm [cont.]
Example: Tuning of
CH
and
Settings:
MS_Power_MAX = 33 dBm
P
BTS
after connector = 40 dBm

= 1

CH
tune
CH
in order to reach the Minimum RXLEV
UL
at the BTS side
assume RXLEV
UL
= - 80 dBm

CH
=
0
- 48 - RXLEV
UL
- P
BTS

CH
= 33 - 48 - (-80) - 40 = 25 dBm
Section 1 Module 1 Page 153
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 153
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control
It relies on RXQUAL except between CS3 and CS4 adaptation, where
the new metric I_LEVEL_TNi (interference level) is also considered
If CS-4 is used, the MS is allowed to report RXQUAL = 7
AV_RXQUAL_ST (Short Term average), AV_RXQUAL_LT (Long Term
average) and AV_SIR (Signal to Interference Ratio) are respectively
averaged values at MFS side, of the RXQUAL and I_LEVEL_TNi
measurements received from the MS in Packet DL Ack/Nack
messages
AV_RXQUAL_ST
Triggering condition AV_RXQual_ST aim to decrease the coding scheme number
as fast as possible when the radio conditions degraded significantly. Reaction
would be much slower if it was only based on a long-term average, which could
results in a TBF release
Section 1 Module 1 Page 154
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 154
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]

O&M threshold
and hysteresis
new CS
current CS
- AV_RXQUAL_ST
- AV_RXQUAL_LT
- AV_SIR
MS MFS
(RXQUAL, I_Level_TNi)
Packet DL Ack/Nack
(RXQUAL, I_Level_TNi)
Packet DL Ack/Nack
Averaging
Link
adaptation
Interference measurements performed during
idle frames of the 52 multiframe (twice during
240ms):
I_LEVEL_TN 0 = I > C
I_LEVEL_TN 1 = C - 2dB < I C
I_LEVEL_TN 2 = C - 4dB < I C - 2dB
I_LEVEL_TN 3 = C - 6dB < I C - 4dB
...
I_LEVEL_TN 14 = C - 28dB < I C - 26dB
I_LEVEL_TN 15 = I C - 28dB
MFS uses the I_LEVEL_TNi received to calculate
the AV_SIR value
In case of DL GPRS TBF with PDCH allocated on
BCCH TRX and no frequency hopping on the
BCCH TRX, the MS does not report any
interference levels usage of BLER (Block
Erasure Rate) instead of interference levels
Drawback of putting GPRS on BCCH freq : no measure of interference levels
Section 1 Module 1 Page 155
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 155
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]
Current
CS
CS
i
-> CS
i+1
CS
i
-> CS
i-1

CS1 AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_1_2
-
CS2 AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_2_3
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2 + CS_HST_DL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2 + CS_HST_DL_ST
CS3
AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_3_4
AND
AV_SIR > CS_SIR_DL_3_4
(CS3_BLER < CS_BLER_DL_3_4)
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3 + CS_HST_DL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3 + CS_HST_DL_ST
CS4 -
AV_SIR < CS_SIR_DL_3_4 + CS_SIR_HST_DL
(CS4_BLER > CS_BLER_DL_4_3)

Coding Scheme changing decision for a downlink GPRS TBF:
As it has been observed (in the Alcatel labs during the B8 release validation) that some MS do not
report any interference measurements when the BCCH carrier is included in the frequency hopping
sequence of the allocated PDCH, the algorithm described above is slightly modified in the MR2 version
of the B8 release.
A new triggering condition is used for the CS change between CS3 and CS4. This new triggering
condition shall be applied only to the TBF that do not report any interference level measurements.
Each time a Packet DL Ack/Nack message is received:
either it contains no interference measurements and the new algorithm is applied,
or it contains interference measurements and the standard algorithm is applied.
With the new algorithm, the interference level is replaced by the BLER (RLC BLock Error Rate):
the CS3 BLER is used for a CS change from CS3 to CS4,
the CS4 BLER is used for a CS change from CS4 to CS3.
Remarks :
case of a DL TBF with PDCH allocated on the BCCH TRX and no frequency hopping on the BCCH
TRX : the MS does not report any interference level measurements in the Packet DL Ack/Nack
message (no interference measurements on the BCCH carrier),
case of a DL TBF with PDCH having the BCCH carrier belonging to the frequency hopping
sequence : depending on MS implementation, some MS may not report any interference
measurements (behavior observed in the Alcatel labs during the B8 release validation).
Section 1 Module 1 Page 156
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 156
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.10 Link adaptation: DL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]

AV_RXQUAL_LT
AV_SIR
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2 + CS_HST_DL_LT
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2
CS_QUAL_DL_2_3
C S_QUAL_DL_3_4
0
7
0
15 CS_SIR_DL_4_3 CS_SIR_DL_3_4
CS1 or CS2 (hysteresis)
CS2 or CS3 (hysteresis)
CS3
or
CS4
CS_QUAL_DL_2_3 + CS_HST_DL_LT
CS_HST_DL_LT and CS_HST_DL_ST are introduced to have hysteresis
mechanisms, to avoid ping-pong effects between coding schemes:
The change from CS-3 to CS-4 is not only based on AV_RXQUAL_LT for the two following reasons:
RXQUAL range only goes down to 0.2%. However, the change of the coding scheme from CS-3 to CS-4
will probably have to be done for even lower values. Indeed, when the coding scheme is CS-4, in
static (AWGN), a BLER of 0.1 (typical value of the BLER threshold to change from CS-3 to CS-4) is
obtained for a raw BER of 1-(1-0.1)1/456 = 2.10-4. This raw BER would be larger in multipath
channels but is likely to remain below 0.2%. This means that CS_QUAL_DL_3_4 should be close to 0
and that a condition based on RXQUAL is not sufficient to change the coding scheme from CS-3 to CS-
4.
If the changes from CS-3 to CS-4 and from CS-4 to CS-3 are based on different metrics, a Ping-Pong
effect may occur. Indeed, it may happen that the conditions to change from CS-3 to CS-4 and CS-4 to
CS-3 are simultaneously true in some situations.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 157
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 157
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control

O&M threshold
and hysteresis
new CS
current CS
- AV_RXQUAL_ST
- AV_RXQUAL_LT
UL RLC block
Averaging
Link
adaptation
MS MFS BTS
RXQUAL
measurement
UL RLC block (RXQUAL)
UL RLC block (RXQUAL)
It is based only on RXQUAL,
measured by the BTS
Interference measurements
are not reported by the BTS
to the MFS
AV_RXQUAL_ST (Short Term
average), AV_RXQUAL_LT (Long
Term average) are averaged
values of the RXQUAL received
from the BTS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 158
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 158
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]
Current
CS
CS
i
-> CS
i+1
CS
i
-> CS
i-1

CS1 AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_1_2 -
CS2 AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_2_3
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_1_2 + CS_HST_UL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_1_2 + CS_HST_UL_ST
CS3 AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_3_4
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_2_3 + CS_HST_UL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_2_3 + CS_HST_UL_ST
CS4 -
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_3_4 + CS_HST_UL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_3_4 + CS_HST_UL_ST

Coding Scheme changing decision for uplink GPRS TBF:
AV_RXQUAL_ST is a short term average whereas AV_RXQUAL_LT is a long term average. The short term
average is used to react quickly in case of fast degradation of the radio conditions.
X = FH or NFH: two thresholds are available for hopping and non-hopping TRXs.
Y = ACK or NACK: two thresholds are available for RLC acknowledged and unacknowledged modes.
The thresholds should be chosen so that:
CS_HST_UL_ST > CS_HST_UL_LT > 0
Section 1 Module 1 Page 159
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 159
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.11 Link adaptation: UL GPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]

AV_RXQUAL_LT
AV_SIR
CS1
CS2
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2 + CS_HST_UL_LT
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2
CS_QUAL_UL_2_3
0
7
0
15
CS1 or CS2 (hysteresis)
CS2 or CS3 (hysteresis)
CS3
CS4
CS3 or CS4 (hysteresis)
CS_QUAL_UL_3_4
CS_QUAL_UL_2_3 + CS_HST_UL_LT
CS_QUAL_UL_3_4 + CS_HST_UL_LT
CS_HST_UL_LT and CS_HST_UL_ST are introduced to have
hysteresis mechanisms, to avoid ping-pong effects between coding
schemes:
In the uplink, the RXQUAL is available in CS-4 and the SIR measurements are not reported by the BTS to the
MFS so far. Therefore, it is possible to also use RXQUAL measurements to change the coding scheme from CS-3
to CS-4 or from CS-4 to CS-3, contrary to the downlink algorithm, where the SIR was used.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 160
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 160
Two new metrics are introduced in EGPRS, Mean_BEP (mean Bit error
Probability) and CV_BEP (Coefficient of Variation of BEP), to offset the fact
that RXQUAL, does not provide an accurate estimation of the bit error rate
of the radio channel
BEP measured on burst basis, is a reflection of the current C/I, time dispersion
of the signal and the velocity of the terminal
The variation of BEP value over several bursts also provides additional
information regarding velocity and frequency hopping
The mechanism is more efficient than in GPRS, since measurements are taken on
every burst and not only during the idle frames
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.12 Link adaptation in EGPRS: New metrics

=
=
4
1 i
i burst block
BEP
4
1
MEAN_BEP


=
= =

=
4
1 i
i burst
2
4
1 k
4
1 i
i burst k burst
block
BEP
4
1
BEP
4
1
BEP
3
1
CV_BEP
For more details about MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averages performed by the MS, refer to 3GPP 05.08.
Raw measurements on a radio block basis
For EGPRS (that is during an EGPRS DL TBF), the MS shall calculate the following values, for each radio block (1
radio block = 4 bursts) addressed to it (the DL TBF TFI contained in the radio block must be decoded) :
Mean Bit Error Probability (BEP) of a radio block:
Coefficient of variation of the Bit Error Probability of a radio block:
In the above equations, the BEP is measured on a burst basis by the MS before channel decoding.
Averaging of the raw measurements on a TS basis
The raw measurements made by the MS on a radio block basis are averaged by the MS per TS (TN in the below
equations) and per modulation type (GMSK (MCS1 to MCS4), 8-PSK (MCS5 to MCS9)) as follows:

with (Rn gives the reliability of the averaged quality parameters)


In the above equations :
n is the iteration index, incremented for each DL radio block,
e is a forgetting factor and is calculated according to the BEP_PERIOD cell parameter (new in B8, OMC-R
changeable),
SEE NEXT SLIDE

=
=
4
1
4
1
_
i
i burst block
BEP BEP MEAN


=
= =

=
4
1
2
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
3
1
_
i
i burst
k i
i burst k burst
block
BEP
BEP BEP
BEP CV
n block,
n
n
1 n
n
n
n
MEAN_BEP
R
x
e N MEAN_BEP_T )
R
x
e (1 N MEAN_BEP_T + =

n block,
n
n
1 n
n
n
n
CV_BEP
R
x
e CV_BEP_TN )
R
x
e (1 CV_BEP_TN + =

0 R , x e R e) (1 R
1 n 1 n n
= + =

Section 1 Module 1 Page 161
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 161
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.13 Link adaptation: DL EGPRS Radio Link Control

Average Power
Decrease in 8-PSK
IR
link adaptation
tables
new CS
current CS
MS MFS
(Mean_BEP, CV_BEP)
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack
Link
adaptation
Decision tables are different
depending on whether the
Incremental Redundancy
is activated or not
The link adaptation is based in DL on Mean_BEP and CV_BEP
measurements reported by the MS in every EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack
message
The MS can report 32 different Mean_BEP values (0..31) and 8 different
CV_BEP values (0..7), per modulation type
xn denotes the existence of quality parameters for the nth block, i.e. if the radio block is intended for this MS. xn values 1
and 0 denote the existence and absence of quality parameters, respectively
Measurements reporting
A MS shall report the overall MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP (instead of reporting the RXQUAL and SIGN_VAR values) per
modulation type (that is GMSK_MEAN_BEP, GMSK_CV_BEP and/or 8-PSK_MEAN_BEP, 8-PSK_CV_BEP depending on the
received blocks since the last channel quality report sent to the network) averaged over all allocated channels
(timeslots) as follows:
,
where n is the iteration index at reporting time and j the TS number.
The MS reports the Mean_BEP and CV_BEP values to the MFS in the Channel Quality Report included in the EGPRS
Packet DL Ack/Nack and Packet Resource Request messages.
The MS can report 32 different Mean_BEP values (MEAN_BEP_0 to MEAN_BEP_31). The mapping between the
calculated Mean_BEP value (linear scale) and the reported Mean_BEP value (logarithmic scale) depends on the used
modulation (two mapping tables are given in the 05.08 GSM recommendation : one for GMSK and one for 8-PSK).
The MS can report 8 different CV_BEP values (CV_BEP_0 to CV_BEP_7). The mapping between the calculated and
the reported values is identical for the GMSK and 8-PSK modulations.
Measurements and reporting at BTS side
The BTS measures for each UL burst the BEP and calculates for each UL radio block (4 bursts) the Mean_BEP and the
CV_BEP = Std_BEP / Mean_BEP. The Mean_BEP and the CV_BEP are reported on a radio block basis by the BTS to the
MFS.


=
j
(j)
n
j
(j)
n
(j)
n
n
R
N MEAN_BEP_T R
MEAN_BEP
Section 1 Module 1 Page 162
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 162
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.13 Link adaptation: DL EGPRS Radio Link Control [cont.]


UL RLC block (CV_BEP, Mean_BEP)
new CS
current CS
UL RLC block
Averaging
Link
adaptation
MS MFS BTS
CV_BEP, Mean_BEP
computation
UL RLC block (CV_BEP, Mean_BEP)
Average Power
Decrease in 8-PSK
IR
link adaptation
tables

In the UL, Mean_BEP and
CV_BEP are computed in
the BTS and sent to the
MFS, in each radio block
The MFS averages Mean_BEP
and CV_BEP and then, a
decision can be taken on
the link adaptation
Section 1 Module 1 Page 163
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 163
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.14 EGPRS Link Adaptation Decision
The MFS verify if a MCS change is needed each time it receives new
MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP measurements, based on the following algorithm:
IR activated
?
GMSK / 8-PSK
?
APD value
GMSK tables 8-PSK tables
MCS 1..4 MCS 5..9
GMSK / 8-PSK
?
APD value
GMSK tables 8-PSK tables
MCS 1..4 MCS 5..9
RLC Acknowledge Mode
YES NO
GMSK 8-PSK 8-PSK GMSK
Section 1 Module 1 Page 164
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 164
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.15 TRX ranking/TRX transmission pool set-up
TRX <--> TRX transmission pool
ordered list of TRXs
for PS traffic
TRX <--> TRE
TRX ranking
for PS traffic
TRX transmission
pool set-up
TRX characteristics
TRX transmission pools
TRX ranking
PS capable TRXs (TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) are
ranked at BSC side for PS traffic (from the
highest to the lowest), according to the following
criteria :
TRX supporting the BCCH, if PS_Pref_BCCH_TRX = 0
TRX capability (EGPRS capable High Power, then
EGPRS capable Medium Power and finally non-
EGPRS capable)
Dual Rate capability (FR, then DR)
Size of the PDCH-group
This ranking will be used in the reverse order for
CS traffic
TRX transmission pool set-up
A TRX transmission pool groups, together extra Abis nibbles for one TRX
The biggest TRX transmission pools are allocated to the TRXs having the highest
ranking for PS traffic.
p.90 et p.91
Section 1 Module 1 Page 165
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 165
Example:
5 TREs in a cell
1 G4-HP TRE
2 G4-MP TREs
2 G3 TREs
PS_Pref_BCCH_TRX = 0 (no specific preference)
5 TRXs
TRXa, TRXb, TRXc, TRXd: TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 (PS capable)
TRXe: TRX_PREF_MARK > 0 (non PS capable)
3 DR TRXs
Pool types
1 type 4
1 type 2
2 type 1
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.15 TRX ranking/TRX transmission pool set-up [cont.]
TREs

Dual Rate
usage
associated
TRXs
PS capable
TRX ranking
associated
transmission
pool
G4 - HP FR TRXa 1 type 4
G4 - MP FR TRXb 2 type 2
G4 - MP DR TRXc 3 type 1
G3 DR TRXd 4 type 1
G3 DR TRXe

Section 1 Module 1 Page 166
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 166
For GPRS: the max CS configured (MAX_GPRS_CS)
For EGPRS:
TRX type (n=1 to 5), received from BSC
Hardware PS capability of each TRX, received from
the BSC
En_EGPRS (parameter to allow or not EGPRS in the
cell), received from the BSC
Max_GPRS_CS (parameter which gives the highest
usable CS in the cell), received from the BSC
Max_EGPRS_MCS (parameter which gives the highest
usable MCS in the cell)
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.16 TRX capability for PS traffic

Max_EGPRS_MCS
O&M
GPRS capability
(CS2/CS3/CS4)
Max_GPRS_CS
TRX GPRS
capability
- HW PS
capability
- TRX
type
BSC
EGPRS capability
(MCS 1-MCS 9)
En_EGPRS
TRX EGPRS
capability
TRX capabilities are determined at MFS side, taking into account:
p.119
Section 1 Module 1 Page 167
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 167
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.17 Radio Resource Allocation: Overview
To offer high throughput to EGPRS MSs :
EGPRS TBFs are preferentially allocated on high class TRXs
Multiplexing, on the same PDCH, a DL EGPRS TBF with an UL GPRS TBF
has to be avoided, since in this case, the DL EGPRS is limited to GMSK
(i.e. MCS4) new PDCH state: EGPRS
To fairly share throughput between EGPRS TBFs:
A higher number of EGPRS TBFs has to be piled up on high class TRXs
than on low class TRXs. This ratio has to take into account the maximum
throughput which can be offered by each class of TRX
specific TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs
To optimize GPRS throughput (i.e. high class TRX usage), as long as
it does not conflict with EGPRS traffic
A new reallocation trigger (T4) is created in order to reallocate an UL
GPRS TBF which is multiplexed with a DL EGPRS TBF
Section 1 Module 1 Page 168
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 168
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state
All the following PDCH states are related to establish TBFs:
Allocated : The PDCH is a slave PDCH, which has been indicated as usable
for PS traffic by the BSC
Active : An allocated PDCH is active if it supports at least one radio
resource allocated for a TBF or for a RT PFC
Full :
For GPRS TBF:
The number of established TBFs (GPRS + EGPRS TBFs) is equal to
MAX_UL/DL_TBF_SPDCH.
For EGPRS TBF:
The number of established EGPRS TBFs is equal to MAX_UL/DL_TBF_SPDCH.
EGPRS : SPDCH used in the DL direction by a 8-PSK capable EGPRS TBF.
This state is meaningful only for non-EGPRS capable MSs and only in the
UL direction.
!!! New states in B9 !!!
Full : for GPRS TBF : GPRS + EGPRS ts are counted, because some EGPRS TBF on GPRS PDCH are using GMSK
MCS.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 169
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 169
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state [cont.]
New state for GPRS PDCH
PDCH used in DL direction by 8-PSK capable EGPRS TBF, i.e PDCH does
not belong to a class 1 TRX
meaningful only
for non-EGPRS capable MS
only in UL direction
When meaningful, it overwrites active and busy states but not the
full state
Avoids multiplexing of UL GPRS TBF and DL EGPRS TBF, in order
to not reduce the EGPRS throughput
Section 1 Module 1 Page 170
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 170
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.18 Radio Resource Allocation: PDCH state [cont.]
MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
Full Active Allocated
DOWNLINK
MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
Full Active Allocated
UPLINK
[EGPRS]
[EGPRS]
One SPDCH has one state per direction (i.e., one state for the UL, one state for the DL). This state depends on the type of the MSs (EGPRS
capable or non-EGPRS capable) for which the radio resource (re)-allocation algorithm is called.
radio resource allocated to the MFS, but associated transmission resources are not allocated (i.e., the PDCH is not established).
All the following states are related to established PDCHs:
empty:
the PDCH is established, but no established TBF.
active:
For GPRS TBF: at least one established TBF and the number of established TBFs (GPRS + EGPRS) is smaller than
N_TBF_PER_SPDCH.
For EGPRS TBF: at least one established EGPRS TBF and the number of EGPRS TBFs (1) is smaller than N_TBF_PER_SPDCH.
busy:
For GPRS TBF: the number of established TBFs (GPRS and EGPRS TBFs) is greater or equal to N_TBF_PER_SPDCH, but smaller
than MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
For EGPRS TBF: the number of established EGPRS TBFs (1) is greater or equal to N_TBF_PER_SPDCH, but smaller than
MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
full:
For GPRS TBF: the number of established TBFs (GPRS + EGPRS TBFs) is equal to MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
For EGPRS TBF: the number of established EGPRS TBFs (3) is equal to MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH/MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH.
EGPRS (2)
PDCH used in the DL direction by an 8-PSK capable EGPRS TBF (i.e., the PDCH does not belong to a class 1 TRX).
This state is meaningful only for non-EGPRS capable MSs and only in the UL direction.
When meaningful, it overwrites active and busy states (but not the full state).
(1): Only EGPRS TBFs are taken into account to avoid to establish EGPRS TBFs on PDCHs with a low EGPRS capability, because of
GPRS TBFs.
(2): The aim of this new state is to avoid multiplexing UL GPRS TBF and DL EGPRS TBF, in order not to reduce EGPRS throughput.
(3): Only EGPRS TBFs are taken into account to avoid radio resource allocation failure because of the restricted list of EGPRS
capable TRXs.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 171
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 171
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs
Specific conditions are defined for TRX selection in case of
allocation or reallocation for EGPRS capable MS
To allocate EGPRS TBFs preferentially on TRX which allows a high
throughput
Principle:
As long as the TRXs with the highest throughput do not support a
maximum number of EGPRS TBFs, the other EGPRS capable TRXs are not
taken into account by the algorithm
Section 1 Module 1 Page 172
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 172
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]
Following internal variables are defined:
N_TRX_EGPRS : number of TRXs on which EGPRS MSs are served in EGPRS
mode
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current(TRXi) : maximum number of EGPRS TBFs per
PDCH, currently allocated in TRXi
N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj
It defines for each EGPRS TRX capability (MCSi) in the cell the number of
EGPRS TBFs per PDCH beyond which it becomes more interesting to serve
upcoming EGPRS MSs on TRXs with a lower EGPRS capability (MCSj).
Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSi / Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSj
with Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSx is the maximum theoretical throughput that
can be achieved at RLC/MAC per PDCH using MCSx encoding
Section 1 Module 1 Page 173
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 173
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]
EGPRS TRX capability
(MCSi)
Immediately lower TRX
capability (MCSj)
N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj
MCS3 MCS2 1
MCS4 MCS2 1
MCS5 MCS2 2
MCS6 MCS5 1
MCS2 2
MCS6 1
MCS7 MCS5 2
MCS2 4
MCS6 1
MCS8 MCS5 2
MCS2 4
MCS8 1
MCS9 MCS6 2
MCS5 2
MCS2 5

All the values between MCS2 and MCS9 are possible because of the
O&M parameter Max_EGPRS_MCS
Different used thresholds :
N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj are internal parameters which define for each EGPRS TRX capability, in the cell, the
number of EGPRS TBFs per PDCH beyond which it becomes more interesting to serve upcoming EGPRS MSs on
TRXs with a lower EGPRS capability.
This value depends on the throughput gap between 2 consecutive TRXs inside the ordered (according to TRX
Rank) list of EGPRS capable TRXs.
N_TBF_PDCH_MCSi_MCSj = Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSi DIV Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSj
Max_PDCH_Throughput_MCSx is the maximum theoretical throughput that can be achieved at RLC/MAC
per PDCH using MCSx encoding.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 174
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 174
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]
Example
Assuming that in a cell the following TRXs are EGPRS capable:
TRXa: EGPRS capability = MCS9
TRXb: EGPRS capability = MCS5
TRXc: EGPRS capability = MCS5
TRXd: EGPRS capability = MCS2
TRXe: EGPRS capability = MCS2
Two thresholds are used :
N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5 = 2
N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 = 2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 175
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 175
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.19 TRX selection for EGPRS TBFs [cont.]
CELL START
TRXa
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXi) = 0
(with i = a, b, c, d or e )
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXa)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXb)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
OR
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXc)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
TRXa, TRXb, TRXc
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXa)
= N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5
TRXa, TRXb, TRXc, TRXd, TRXe
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXb)
= N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
AND
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXc)
= N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXa)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS9_MCS5
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXb)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
OR
MAX_TBF_PDCH_Current (TRXc)
< N_TBF_PDCH_MCS5_MCS2 _
Section 1 Module 1 Page 176
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 176
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: GPRS/EGPRS TBFs
. If it is not a T3 reallocation TRXs for which have already enough GCHs
established on the M-EGCH link
A. Lowest number of PDCHs in the EGPRS state
B. Highest available throughput in the direction of the bias
C. Highest available throughput in the direction opposite to the bias
D. TRX with the highest priority
E. For EGPRS Best Effort TBFs establishments Lowest number of GPRS
TBFs in the direction of the bias
F. Combination with the PDCHs that have the lowest index.
HIGH HIGH
LOW LOW
I
M
P
O
R
T
A
N
C
E
!!! New in B9 !!!
Section 1 Module 1 Page 177
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 177
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: EGPRS TBFs [cont.]
E) The candidate timeslot allocations which have the lowest number
of established EGPRS TBFs in the direction of the bias are preferred
It is preferred to multiplex an EGPRS TBF with a GPRS TBF, rather
than with another EGPRS TBF
F) The candidate timeslot allocations which have the lowest number
of established EGPRS TBFs in the direction opposite to the bias are
preferred
G) The candidate timeslot allocations which are on a TRX with
highest priority are preferred
H) The candidate timeslot allocations which have the lowest number
of established GPRS TBFs in the direction of the bias are preferred
H has a lowest priority than G, in order to avoid to establish
EGPRS TBFs on low class TRXs, because of GPRS TBFs
HIGH HIGH
LOW LOW
I
M
P
O
R
T
A
N
C
E
Section 1 Module 1 Page 178
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 178
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.20 Radio Resource Allocation: EGPRS TBFs [cont.]
I) The candidate timeslot allocations which have all their PDCHs
established are preferred. If all the preferred best candidate
timeslot allocations require additional PDCHs, then a request is sent
to the BSC and the algorithm is stopped
J) If the MS has already one or 2 TBFs established, preference is
given to the candidate timeslot allocation which does not require a
T2 reallocation of the on-going TBFs
K) The candidate timeslot allocation with the PDCHs that have the
lowest index is preferred
HIGH HIGH
LOW LOW
I
M
P
O
R
T
A
N
C
E
Section 1 Module 1 Page 179
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 179
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.21 Radio Resource Allocation: TBF Re-allocation
B8/B9 release: 4 types of TBF reallocations:
T1: re-allocation to
maintain a TBF alive despite a pre-emption on a PACCH of a TBF
or if MEGCH becomes too low to provide MAX MCS of the TBF [B9]
T2: re-allocation of an on-going TBF when establishing a concurrent TBF
in order to provide a better throughput
T3: re-allocation to offer a better throughput to an on-going TBFs
In order to provide a higher throughput, if it is possible, to any TBF in the cell.
T4: re-allocation condition to move
UL GPRS TBF sharing one PDCH with a DL EGPRS TBF
PDCHs which do not carry a DL EGPRS TBF
B9 : Same types as in B8, but extended possibilities
T2 : It is the case in the following scenarios:
- establishment of a downlink TBF, concurrent to an existing uplink TBF, which is
allocated in such a way that the maximum number of timeslots supported in the
direction of the bias cannot be offered to the MS.
- similar situation in case of uplink TBF establishment concurrent to a downlink TBF;
Section 1 Module 1 Page 180
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 180
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.22 Radio Resource Allocation: Min_PDCH
Min_PDCH: O&M parameter per cell
Minimum number of PDCHs that are always allocated to the MFS.
B8/B9 release: Min_PDCH takes into account:
The pre-allocated SPDCH but not established (w/o GCH resource)
The SPDCH pre-allocated and established for the fast initial (E)GPRS access
The MPDCH represented by the parameter Nb_TS_MPDCH
Thus, the initial allocation process takes into consideration:
IF EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = 0 (false)
MIN_PDCH - Nb_TS_MPDCH SPDCH are requested to the BSC and pre-allocated
on the TRX with the highest priority
IF EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = 1 (true)
MIN_PDCH - Nb_TS_MPDCH - 1 SPDCH are requested to the BSC and pre-
allocated on the TRX with the highest priority
Section 1 Module 1 Page 181
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 181
3 (E)GPRS Radio Algorithms
3.23 Radio Resource Allocation: Fast initial (E)GPRS access
Also called : Immediate UL TBF establishment
To provide always one established PDCH, usable for UL GPRS and UL
EGPRS TBFs, even if there is no PS traffic at all
A TBF can be immediately established without requesting
transmission resource connection to the BSC
EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS, parameter per cell
flag to indicate whether or not one Slave PDCH for (E)GPRS traffic usage
will be statically established in the cell
Min: 0; Max: 1; Default 0
Section 1 Module 1 Page 182
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 182
4 General (E)GPRS planning principels
Section 1 Module 1 Page 183
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 183
4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.1 Throughput Dependency -> Interference (and Level)
Note: the throughput values are ETSI requirements, the C/I values are valid for TU3, SFH enabled
CS-2
CS-1
C/I = 9 dB
Level of interfer cell
Level (dBm)
Distance
RL/MAC net
Data Throughput
(kbit/s)
12
8
10.8
7.2
C/I = 13 dB
Level of serving cell
Neighbor cell not really, it is a cell using identical interfering frequencies.
Depending on C/I, CS2 wont provide the same tput (due to lost packets and retransmissions, the useful tput
decreases down to 10.8)
For instance MCS9 can vary from 45 59 kbps
If performing a planning with C/I > 12db : only MS with good C/I will get enough C/I to have max tput.
It is possible to link the C/I and RXLEV to simplify analysis (rxlev = f(C/I), depending on netwpork planning)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 184
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 184
Packet data
throughput (ETSI)
Maximum (error free
transmission) on Air
Interface
at BLER=10%
Degradation of RLC
by Level and
Interference
System Scheme Max RLC data through-
put (RLC payload)
[kbps]
RLC data throughput
at Reference Point
(BLER=10%)
[kbps]

EGPRS MCS-9 59.2 53.3
MCS-8 54.4 49.0
MCS-7 44.8 40.3
MCS-6 29.6 26.7
MCS-5 22.4 20.2
MCS-4 17.6 15.9
MCS-3 14.8 13.3
MCS-2 11.2 10.1
MCS-1 8.8 7.9

GPRS CS-4 20.0 18.0
CS-3 14.4 13.0
CS-2 12.0 10.8
CS-1 8.0 7.2

4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.2 Packet data throughput
p.52 and p.64 of 3GPP 45.005
Type of Propagation conditions
channel TU3(no FH) TU3(ideal FH) TU50(no FH) TU50(ideal FH) RA250(no FH)
PDTCH/MCS-5 dB 18 14.5 15.5 14.5 16
PDTCH/MCS-6 dB 20 17 18 17.5 21
PDTCH/MCS-7 dB 23.5 23.5 24 24.5 26.5**
PDTCH/MCS-8 dB 28.5 29 30 30 *
PDTCH/MCS-9 dB 30 32 33 35 *
Section 1 Module 1 Page 185
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 185
4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.3 Reference performance point
ETSI -> Simulation of coding scheme performance under different
environment and fading conditions
typical urban environment with mobile speed of 3 km/h (TU3)
typical urban environment with mobile speed of 50 km/h (TU50)
typical hilly terrain with mobile speed of 100 km/h (HT100)
typical rural area with mobile speed of 250 km/h (RA250)
The impact of Level and interference has been studied in order to
find the minimum required Level and C/I ratio for the reference
error performance, defined by a block error rate Block Error Rate
(BLER) of 10%, the reference performance point
Why is this important?
Saturation effect
For data, most users are static (TU3)
Japanese/Korean behaviour : they use data while in subways and trains. Appearing in France due to tv
online.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 186
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 186
4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.4 Saturation effect
Throughput curve as required by ETSI for CS-1and CS-2, typical urban environment with MS speed 3 km/h TU3 with SFH
C/I 0
4
8
12
16
20
3dB 7dB 11dB 15dB 19dB 23dB 27dB
kbit/s
CS1
CS2
The reference performance point is reached at BLER=10%
The following data rates can be achieved at this point:
CS-1: C/I=9 dB =>7.2 kbit/s (saturation: 8 kbit/s)
CS-2: C/I=13 dB =>10.8 kbit/s (saturation: 12 kbit/s)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 187
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 187
4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.4 Saturation effect [cont.]
By increase of the C/I ratio
Less retransmission has to be performed (less data blocks are
erroneous)
since saturation occurs. e.g. for CS-1 starting with 7.2 kbit/s at a C/I
ratio of 9dB
With an increasing C/I ratio the data throughput increases only little up
to its maximum value of 8kbit/s (saturation point)
Data throughput increases
Due to this saturation effect, a further increase of the C/I ratio does
not have large impact on the data throughput of a single coding
scheme: possibly a switch to a higher CS may occur (C/I ~ 7 dB for
CS-1 to CS-2)
Reference Performance Point : A tradeoff between the
maximisation of the network throughput and excessive C/I
constraints.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 188
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 188
4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.5 Cell area and throughput
Level of serving cell
1. Throughput at CS-2 saturation point
2. Throughput at CS-2 reference performance point 3. Throughput at CS-1 saturation point
4. Throughput at CS-1 reference performance point
CS-2
CS-1
C/I = 9
dB
Level of neighbor-cell
Level (dBm)
Distance
12
8
10.8
7.2
C/I = 13 dB
RL/MAC net
Data Throughput
(kbit/s)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 189
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 189
4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.6 Throughput <-> C/I
ETSI requirements and Alcatel values for C/I
co
and C/I
adj
for CS and GPRS
(PDCH) GSM 900 (Requirement for GMSK modulation: C/I
adj
= C/I
co
18dB)
In general: With higher coding scheme, higher C/I ratios required
GPRS functionality more sensitive against interference
-9 -8.2 -8.8 -6 -13 -12 -13 -9
C/I adj-
channel
Alcatel
10.8 11.1 10.3 13.1 6.5 7.5 6.7 11.5
C/I co-
channel
Alcatel
-5 -4 -5 -3 -9 -8 -9 -5 -9
C/I adj-
channel ETSI
13 14 13 15 9 10 9 13 9
C/I co-
channel
ETSI
TU50
ideal FH
TU50
TU3
ideal FH
TU3
TU50
ideal FH
TU50
TU3
ideal FH
TU3
CS2 CS1
Packet switched
Circuit
switched
GSM 900
Ideal FH : hopping on 4 or more frequencies with at least 800kHz separation between each channel offers
the "ideal FH" diversity gain (4 to 5 dB)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 190
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 190
4 General (E)GPRS planning principles
4.6 Throughput <-> C/I [cont.]
Parameters :
GPRS
C/I Throughput
Co-channel
Interferer
TU 50
no FH
5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
TU50 (900 MHz) no fh
C / I
c o
[dB]
T
h
r
o
u
g
h
p
u
t

1
3

J
u
l

2
0
0
0

0
9
:
4
5
:
4
4
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
CS4 can't resist to interference, even with high C/I, it doesn't reach the saturation point. Expect high
retransmission % when using CS4.
For each C/I, a typical tput can be expected. CS adaptation gives flexibility in case of radio conditions
changes.
At start of a session, which CS to choose?
How would the curve looks like if TU3 was used ? (C/I scale would be squeezed)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 191
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 191
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
Section 1 Module 1 Page 192
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 192
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.1 GPRS network planning
Two different cases are possible to introduce GPRS service:
GPRS Greenfield planning means
Dedicated analysis of GPRS network design
All GPRS cells will be designed for maximum throughput performances
So the (GPRS) cell ranges could be smaller as used to be in a pure GSM
network, designed for speech service only
Introduction of GPRS in operating GSM cells
GPRS performance is strongly depending on GSM network quality
Cell ranges are depending from GSM service planning
Section 1 Module 1 Page 193
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 193
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.2 GPRS Greenfield planning
Measures to reach GPRS QoS
RA Planning + CAE Data
GPRS Throughput Analysis
Traffic Analysis
Field strength prediction
Mutual interference calculation
GSM/GPRS frequency planning
Cell specific interference calculation
TRX assignment to GPRS service
GPRS features
GSM features
Objectives
Traffic Analysis
PS Traffic
User Profile
Market applications
Customer questionnaire
Traffic model: Example
GPRS traffic calculation
- Straight forward
- Erlang C
- Traffic tool
- Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods
Section 1 Module 1 Page 194
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 194
GPRS traffic calculation
Traffic Analysis
PS Traffic
User Profile
User Behavior
Market applications
Customer questionnaire
Traffic model: Example
GPRS traffic calculation
Straight forward
Erlang C
Traffic tool
Different traffic calculation
procedure for packet traffic
compared to speech traffic
calculation
Section 1 Module 1 Page 195
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 195
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.3 GPRS traffic calculation and traffic analysis
The traffic analysis is done to have the amount of resources
(frequencies) one needs to carry GSM+GPRS traffic
CS traffic demand (Circuit Switched, derived from Erlang B formula)
PS (Packet Switched) traffic demand has also to be taken into account
for the capacity calculation
What is PS or GPRS traffic?
Section 1 Module 1 Page 196
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 196
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.4 GPRS traffic calculation and PS traffic
The PS traffic demand (or user throughput demand) is derived from
an average traffic data volume generated by each type of GPRS
subscriber
GPRS traffic volume is given on a monthly basis as sum of used
applications data volume.
Today all PS traffic values are based on assumptions until useful
experience values are available
The traffic values are collected in a traffic model
In general, the traffic from PS services is depending on:
User profile
User behavior
Market applications and service distributions
User profile : what kind of applications ? which volumes ?
User behaviour : what time ? how long ? where ?
Market applications : what is proposed to customers : video on demand ? Live tv ? Mmp games ?
Section 1 Module 1 Page 197
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 197
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.4 GPRS traffic calculation and PS traffic [cont.]

User profi le
Market applications
and serv i ce distributions
User behavior
Customer
Questionnaire
Traffic calculation
Traffic model
Section 1 Module 1 Page 198
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 198
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.5 GPRS traffic calculation and user profile
A user profile defines a typical user for packet data services, using a
certain amount of applications
It is useful to limit the amount of user profiles to keep the calculation
simple, e.g. two profiles can be introduced, business and private user
Section 1 Module 1 Page 199
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 199
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.6 GPRS traffic calculation and market applications
Market applications
Different services are possible for packet data use e.g. new designed
services or services known from the fixed network
Market applications and user profiles are related to each other, thus
some applications are assigned to one user profile only
Each service is characterized by its occurrence: action time per month
and the related bit rate per action.
In some applications, the data exchange traffic is oriented to downlink,
in some others to uplink. Generally the downlink traffic is preponderant
in asymmetrical applications such as: web browsing, information
downloading, audio downloading etc.
This shall be taken into account for the dimensioning process: so the
dimensioning will be downlink oriented.
Difference between prepaid and postpaid ?
Daily services : weather forecast, news
Hourly : road traffic, market shares
Uplink bias applications : MMS, ftp upload. Create problem for dimesionning ? No, because MMS are
uploaded and then downloaded. They create equal traffic in both ways.
Current Ms use 2ts in uplink, class 11 and 12 are coming (up to 4 TS in uplink, but still simplex.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 200
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 200
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.7 GPRS traffic calculation and user behavior
Important for the user behavior is the daily distribution
Duration and occurrence time of busy hour (BH), assumption busy hour is
same for CS and PS
The user distribution over the planning area
Following definitions can be only expected values for the
introduction of GPRS (homogeneous traffic distribution over the cell
area is assumed)
GPRS subscriber percentage (%), related to the total (CS+PD) subscriber
number
GPRS user profiles percentage (%), related to the total GPRS subscriber
number
Geographical percentage distribution (%) of GPRS user profiles related to
morphostructure
Daily GPRS user profile activity (days/month)
Core network : can provide statistics per user (pdp context activation, gprs attach, APN usage, etc)
Which interface : Gb (mfs-sgsn) , Gn (sgsn-ggsn)
Special tools : astelia
Section 1 Module 1 Page 201
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 201
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.8 Customer questionnaire
Customer questionnaire
Data collection from Operator -> Forecast data
To keep process simple -> 12 Points questionnaire
1. Total amount of GSM subscribers in the network (CS+PS subscribers)
2. Blocking at air interface (speech)
3. Speech traffic per subscriber (mErl/sub)
4. Distribution of CS subscribers to different morpho classes
5. Percentage of GPRS subscribers related to the total amount of GSM
subscribers
6. Busy hour occurrence for speech traffic and packet data traffic
This questions are asked to the operator
Speech traffic : from 10mErl to 25 mErl (depends on network age and area covered)
6. Busy hour mix (BHM) : at busy hour, split of different types of traffic
Section 1 Module 1 Page 202
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 202
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.8 Customer questionnaire [cont.]
7. User profile definition
8. Market applications definition and relation to user profiles
9. PS user behaviour/distribution:
daily GPRS user profile activity (days/month)
GPRS user profiles percentage (%), related to the total GPRS subscriber number
geographical percentage distribution (%) of GPRS user profiles related to
morphostructure
10. Number of BTS in the existing network
11. Distribution of existing BTS to morphoclasses
12. Number of TRX/BTS, in accordance to morphoclass
Section 1 Module 1 Page 203
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 203
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.9 Traffic Model (Example)
The table summarizes the assumptions
made for the traffic profiles of GPRS
subscribers
(days/month): business 22 days, private 30
Total GPRS Users 7%: 2% private and 5 %
business
urban = 70% business, 50% private
rural = 30% business, 50% private
2.380 8.124 Mbytes/Month TOTAL
- - Mbytes/Month
1024 - Kbytes/Min
- - Min/Month Audio (MP3)
e.g. (Access audio files on
the net)
0.146 0.586 Mbytes/Month
75 75 Kbytes
2 8 usage/Month e-Commerce
(e.g. On-line shopping)
1.17 1.464 Mbytes/Month
60 60 Kbytes
20 25 info/Month Information (e.g.
Location, event,
transportation services)
0.977 2.441 Mbytes/Month
100 100 Kbytes
10 25 Pages/Month WWW
0.0878 3.516 Mbytes/Month
30 150 Kbytes
3 24 mail/Month E-mail+Attachment
- 0.117 Mbytes/Month
- 20 Kbytes
- 6 Update/Month Remote access (e.g. WEB
data bases general and
specific (law, medicine,
...)
during GPRS ntroduction Market Application
Private Business User Profile
Section 1 Module 1 Page 204
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 204
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.10 User mapping
User mapping and Multi-service mapping
GOAL : to categorize the quality of the three calculation methods
User mapping
One certain resource can be shared simultaneously by different users.
Behavior in GPRS -> Packet switched service for different users on one
timeslot.

User 1
User 2
User 3
User
Timeslot
1
TS 2
TRX
TS 3 TS 4 TS 5 TS 6 TS 7 TS 8
In dimensionning, never take maximum usage as an average value!
User mapping should be quite low, in order to allow a high throughput but requires higher capacity
Section 1 Module 1 Page 205
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 205
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.11 Multi-Service
Multi-Service with GPRS
One user can use different services. So one user is not directly
mapped to only one service in the traffic model examination

User
Service1
e.g. HTTP
Service2
e.g. FTP
Serv ice3
e.g. WAP
Typical http "surfing" usage : 10kB/s (average on 1 hour)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 206
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 206
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.12 QoS per User Application
QoS per User Application Volume@BH
Page size
Queue Delay
Acceptable delay if no resource is available at service attempt
Quantile
Specific elements in the range of a variety X are called quantiles
Bit rate
Queue delay : how long a user can wait before disconnecting ? Usually for data, user can wait up to 30s.
Quantile : percentage of throughputs measures that are within a certain range (to check) STANDARD
DEVIATION !!
Section 1 Module 1 Page 207
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 207
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.13 GPRS traffic calculation
3 different calculations can be used for GPRS traffic calculation
Straight forward
Erlang C
Traffic tool
+ + +
Traffic Model
_
+ +
Erlang C for PS
_ _
+
Straight Forward result
for PS
Multi-service
mapping
QoS per service User mapping
Section 1 Module 1 Page 208
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 208
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]
The straightforward calculation
gives the smallest number of needed PS TS among the traffic calculation
methods
It calculates for the whole data volume, sum of all users data, the
number of PDCH TS needed to transfer this data volume, regardless of
data transfer peaks
This method is not taking into account parallel data transfer, which is
the benefit of packet transfer (GPRS).
So no service attempt queuing and no service multiplexing is taken into
account by this method.
A calculation method to get in the first step of GPRS planning an idea of
minimum needed PDCH TS.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 209
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 209
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]
Erlang C calculation
gives for a required service attempt probability (Quantile) and the queue
delay time of it (e.g. 2 s delay can be set if no resource is available at
service attempt), the number of needed resources (TS).
The result of Erlang C will give the biggest number of needed PDCH TS
among the presented packet traffic calculations.
The reason is that a constant data flow is considered which is not the
case for different applications like WAP
For all different services the PDCH TS with Erlang C has to be calculated
and summarized. Afterwards the sum of PDCH TS for the different
services leads to an over dimensioning.
This method can be used to give very fast a planning result on how many
PDCH as maximum can be expected.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 210
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 210
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]
Traffic Model from Alcatel
The traffic tool is the most exact method to calculate the needed PDCH
compared to the above calculation methods
Traffic tool is an automated tool (processed by Alcatel-Lucent only)
Result of this calculation will be most probably between the above calculation
methods
Additionally operator agreed/suggested handling of GPRS channels must
be fixed. This is for example the usage of:
Activation of MPDCH or not
BCCH combined mode or not
Usage of Delayed DL TBF Release or not
QUALITY OF SERVICES [Volume @BH, Page size (KBytes), Queue delay
(seconds), Quantile (%), Bit rate (kbit/s)]
Section 1 Module 1 Page 211
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 211
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.13 GPRS traffic calculation [cont.]
Traffic Model from Alcatel
The traffic tool can calculate the result:
TS needed for CS traffic and signaling in DL/UL
TS needed PS traffic and signaling in DL/UL
TRX calculation for CS and PS with application of reuse of CS TS for PDCH
(PS) when dynamic/smooth PDCH adaptation and /or fast preemption
feature is activated
Section 1 Module 1 Page 212
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 212
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods
General Input data for all 3 calculation methods
GPRS users (Packet Switched Service)=600 per cell
WAP users: 60
WEB users: 180
MMS users: 360
Service data size per user in busy hour (per 3600s)
WAP data size per user 12KB
WEB data size per user 40KB
MMS data size per user 40KB
Coding Scheme : CS-2
Section 1 Module 1 Page 213
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 213
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]
Straight Forward calculation for GPRS Traffic
Needed transfer rate per service for all users
WAP 12KB x 8bit/3600s x 60 users = 1.6 kbit/s
WEB 40KB x 8bit/3600s x 180 users = 16 kbit/s
MMS 40KB x 8bit/3600s x 360 users = 32 kbit/s
Total number of needed PDCH's
Sum of data rate for all services: 49.6 kbit/s
Expected transfer rate per Timeslot (PDCH)= 10 kbit/s in good radio
conditions
Total needed PDCH = 5 PDCH TS / cell
(= 49.6 kbps / 10 kbps)
But assumption is : all users can bare to wait for 3600 sec to finish their download
Section 1 Module 1 Page 214
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 214
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]
Erlang C GPRS traffic calculation
QoS per service
WAP service: bit rate = 5 kbit/s for 90% Quantile and 2s queue delay
WEB service: bit rate = 30 kbit/s for 90% Quantile and 2s queue delay
MMS service: bit rate = 30 kbit/s for 90% Quantile and 2s queue delay
Number of needed PDCH per service
The following results calculation can be done with an Erlang C tool. The
results are listed for each service
in this example here for WAP, WEB and MMS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 215
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 215
Erlang C GPRS traffic calculation
Total number of needed PDCH = 10 PDCH TS
Assumption: Expected rate per TS of 10 kbit/s
For the WAP service 1 resource of 5 kbit/s is needed = 1 PDCH TS
For the WEB service 1 resource of 30 kbit/s is needed = 3 PDCH TS
For the MMS service 2 resources of 30 kbit/s is needed = 6 PDCH TS
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]
E R L A N G C
V
o
l
u
m
e
@
B
H
P
a
g
e

s
i
z
e

(
K
b
y
t
e
s
)
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
b
e
r
s
Q
u
e
u
e

d
e
l
a
y

(
s
)
Q
u
a
n
t
i
l
e
B
i
t

r
a
t
e
4 0 2 1 8 0 2 s 9 0 . 0 % 3 0

1 0 . 5 3 3 3 1 . 8 7 5 0
P
D
C
H

=

R
O

=
M
U

=
E R L A N G C
V
o
l
u
m
e
@
B
H
P
a
g
e

s
i
z
e

(
K
b
y
t
e
s
)
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
b
e
r
s
Q
u
e
u
e

d
e
l
a
y

(
s
)
Q
u
a
n
t
i
l
e
B
i
t

r
a
t
e
4 0 2 3 6 0 2 s 9 0 . 0 % 3 0

2 1 . 0 6 6 7 1 . 8 7 5 0
P
D
C
H

=

R
O

=
M
U

=
WAP
WEB
MMS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 216
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 216
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.14 Exemplary results of the 3 traffic calculation methods [cont.]
TRAFFIC TOOL version 1.0
Results of the traffic tool is:
Used settings in the traffic tool:
No activation of: Combined mode, DL Delayed TBF Release and MPDCH
Call Mix Reference used is: Alcatel B7 reference
6 PDCH TS / cell needed
to cope with GPRS traffic
per cell
Section 1 Module 1 Page 217
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 217
5 (E)GPRS Network introduction
5.15 GPRS traffic calculation result
General GPRS traffic calculation result:
Needed amount of timeslots for PS traffic
makes it possible to go to the next step of GPRS network design process
The user throughput demand is then related to a daily traffic occurrence
(user capacity)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 218
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 218
6 (E)GPRS Network design
Section 1 Module 1 Page 219
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 219
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.1 General
With the input from GPRS traffic calculation the GPRS Design
process can start:
Basis: The knowledge of the amount of timeslots makes it possible to go
to the next step of GPRS network design process
The user throughput demand is then related to a daily traffic occurrence
(user capacity) and in combination with the CS traffic demand, the
needed equipment amount is calculated:
Number of timeslots which may be reserved for GPRS in normal and high load
state of the BSC
Number of timeslots which have to be reserved exclusively for GPRS
Number of remaining timeslots for CS traffic
=> Standard BTS configuration
Section 1 Module 1 Page 220
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 220
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.1 General [cont.]
Standard BTS configuration
The result of traffic analysis gives the standard BTS configuration for
the different traffic areas. The traffic areas are most commonly linked
to a specific morpho class
Next steps:
1. GPRS Field strength prediction is done as for the GSM network planning
[A9155]
2. Inputs for mutual interference calculation [A9155]
3. Inputs for a GSM/GPRS frequency planning [A9155/AFP module]
Section 1 Module 1 Page 221
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 221
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.1 General [cont.]
Cell specific interference calculation
It is done with the results of the GSM/GPRS frequency planning.
The cell specific interference calculation will be used to identify less
interfered frequencies for TRX assignment.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 222
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 222
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.2 Frequency planning
Mostly all GPRS networks will be INTERFERENCE limited
Therefore:
Proper Frequency Re-use
Introduction of Frequency hopping [FH doesn't bring better throughput in
GPRS and E-GPRS while using high CS & MCS]
What is the best Carrier for GPRS - BCCH or TCH?
Make use of improvement strategies
site design changes
e.g. antenna changes, electrical down tilt
site lowering
site densification
network expansion/enhancement strategies (like Dual Band)
Interference limited = C/I limited.
Needs an higher C/I to ensure better tput. Redo a frequency planning with greater constraints on C/I
Best carrier = the carrier with the less interference BCCH ? Normally, yes.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 223
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 223
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.2 Frequency planning [cont.]
BCCH
no DTX, PC (Power Control) or FH (Frequency Hopping)
C/I of minimum 11.5 dB is recommended (Alcatel values)
Disadvantage: only 6 TS available for GPRS
TCH
Hopping, (PC)
all 8 TS available for GPRS
Disadvantage: by hopping -> Interference is RF_load dependent
the increase of RF_load implies a decrease of C/I and therefore of the
throughput
Section 1 Module 1 Page 224
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 224
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.3 Throughput
Throughput -> directly related to link quality and level
Due to this dependency, the shape of a cell is related to the
throughput
GPRS cells are designed in respect to the
desired data transmission (throughput)
behavior of the customers in the planned area
Attention: GPRS service more sensitive against interference and
level than CS service
Therefore GPRS designed cells are smaller than CS designed ones
Section 1 Module 1 Page 225
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 225
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.4 Link budget
In general, the link budget calculation is the same like for CS design
Attention has to be paid to the hardware related values:
BTS/MS performance -> Supplier dependent
BTS output power & receiver sensitivity according to the coding scheme
MS output power & receiver sensitivity according to the coding scheme
Section 1 Module 1 Page 226
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 226
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.4 Link budget [cont.]
Some differences compared to the well-known power budget is the
handling of some losses and margins:
body loss, for PS: 2 dB, due to the fact, that for the most PS applications
the MS is not close to the body , but on an other, from the propagation
point of view unfavorable position (e.g. on the table)
interference margin: minimum 3 dB (urban and dense urban area up to 5
dB, depending of the frequency re-use), due to the high dependency of
the PS service on C/I
(lognormal) fading margin can be added to increase the coverage
probability from 50% up to 95%; e.g. assuming standard deviation sigma =
7 dB =>fading margin:1.65 sigma ~11 dB
Section 1 Module 1 Page 227
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 227
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.4 Link budget [cont.]
GPRS link budget
example,
dimensioned for
the Evolium BTS
(without TRE):
Evolium/900, 3x4
configuration, 1
X-Pol
Antenna/sector,
in comparison to
a CS link budget
Circuit switched mode CS1 (TU 50) CS2 (TU 50)
TX Uplink Downlink Uplink Downlink Uplink Downlink
Internal Power: 33.00 dBm 45.44 dBm 33.00 dBm 45.44 dBm 33.00 dBm 45.44 dBm
Isol.,Comb.,Filter Loss: 0.00 dB 5.01 dB 0.00 dB 5.05dB 0.00 dB 5.05dB
Output Power 33.00 dBm 40.39 dBm 33.00 dBm 40.39 dBm 33.00 dBm 40.39 dBm
Cable,Connectors
Loss:
0.00 dB 3.00 dB 0.00 dB 3.00 dB 0.00 dB 3.00 dB
Body Loss: 3.00 dB 0.0 dB 2.00 dB 0.00 dB 2.00 dB 0.00 dB
Antenna Gain: 0.00 dBi 18.00 dBi 0.00 dBi 18.00 dBi 0.00 dBi 18.00 dBi
Eff. Isotr. Rad. Power: 30.00 dBm 55.43 dBm 31.00 dBm 55.43 dBm 31.00 dBm 55.43 dBm
RX Uplink Downlink Uplink Downlink Uplink Downlink
Rec. Sensitivity: -111.00
dBm
-102.00
dBm
-109.00
dBm
-102.00
dBm
-105.00
dBm
-98.00 dBm
Body Loss: 0.00 dB 3.00 dB 0.00 dB 2.00 dB 0.00 dB 2.00 dB
Cables, Connectors
Loss:
3.00 dB 0.00 dB 3.00 dB 0.00 dB 3.00 dB 0.00 dB
Antenna Gain: 18.00 dBi 0.00 dBi 18.00 dBi 0.00 dBi 18.00 dBi 0.00 dBi
Diversity Gain: 3.00 dB 0.00 dB 3.00 dB 0.00 dB 3.00 dB 0.00 dB
Interference Margin 3.00 dB 3.00 dB 3.00 dB 3.00 dB 3.00 dB 3.00 dB
Fading Margin 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
Isotr. Rec. Power: -126.00
dBm
-96.00
dBm
-124.00
dBm
-97.00
dBm
-120.00 dBm -93.00 dBm
Balance Uplink Downlink Uplink Downlink Uplink Downlink
Max. Path loss 156 dB 151.43 dB 155 dB 152.43 dB 151 dB 148.43 dB
Path loss difference = 3dB standard, 5dB alcatel standard
Uplink Rx sensitivity depends on CS being used.
p. 92 radio network planning aspects
Section 1 Module 1 Page 228
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 228
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.5 Interference analysis on BCCH frequencies
Legend (dB)
> 25 dB
> 16 dB
> 13 dB
> 9 dB
< 9 dB
Network wide C/I (BCCH)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 229
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 229
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.6 Interference analysis on TCH frequencies
Network wide C/I (worst TCH)
Legend (dB)
> 25 dB
> 16 dB
> 13 dB
> 9 dB
< 9 dB
C/I reduction
Section 1 Module 1 Page 230
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 230
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.7 TRX assignment to GPRS service
Some general considerations apply independently from the BSS
software release:
GPRS/EDGE shall be mapped on the TRX(s) with the best radio quality
(lowest interference probability); this can be any TRX in the cell.
Identification of less interfered frequencies and their ranking
Assigning the preference for PS traffic handling to the best ranked frequencies
(e.g High Power TRX, Full rate capable TRX) with the help of the parameters:
TRX_PREF_MARK; PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX, TRX Classes,
Since B7 up to 16 TRX per cell are available for GPRS service. So a
differentiation of GSM and GPRS TS allocation priority on the TRX must be
fixed during planning. The allocation priority for GPRS shall be set according to
GPRS QoS needs.
How to map TRE with TRX ?
PS capable TRXs have to be preferentially mapped (from the best choice to the worst) on:
- FR, HP, EGPRS capable TREs
- DR, HP, EGPRS capable TREs
- FR, MP, EGPRS capable TREs
- DR, MP, EGPRS capable TREs
- FR, non-EGPRS capable TREs
- DR, non-EGPRS capable TREs
(When PS_Pref_BCCH_TRX = TRUE, the TRX supporting the BCCH is mapped on the best TRE)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 231
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 231
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.8 GPRS Analysis
GPRS coverage analysis
What area is covered with what coding scheme?
Area and average throughput distribution
Environment definition (Example)
TU 50
GSM 900 Band
BCCH as GPRS carrier
Section 1 Module 1 Page 232
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 232
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.8 GPRS Analysis [cont.]
GPRS analysis Steps:
C/I based analysis
Coding scheme
Throughput
Analysis in respect to:
Average throughput or/and
throughout hot spots
Section 1 Module 1 Page 233
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 233
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.8 GPRS Analysis [cont.]
GPRS service is C/I limited
Improvements for a larger
CS-4 coverage
-> reduction of the overall
interference situation in the
network (higher achievable
throughput)
Legend (CS value)
CS 4
CS 3
CS 2
CS 1
Network wide Coding Scheme
Distribution (C/I based)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 234
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 234
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.8 GPRS Analysis [cont.]
The system keeps always the
highest coding scheme (and
due to this, the highest
achievable throughput), until
the C/I proportions lead to
change to a lower coding
scheme
By driving through the CS4
area from the center
to the border, a
stepwise degradation
of the throughput depending
from the
C/I ratio is visible
Legend (kbit/s)
19..20 kbit/s
16..18 kbit/s
14..15 kbit/s
7..13 kbit/s
< 7 kbit/s
Network wide GPRS Throughput
(C/I based)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 235
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 235
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning
Routing Area (RA) Definition
CS case with a mobile terminating call:
the MS in idle mode will be paged in all cells belonging to the LA
where the MS is assigned. The signalling effort for paging is thus
focused to a certain area, the LA.
GPRS: the SGSN pages the MS in STANDBY state, in case of a downlink
TBF (comparable to a CS MT call).
Paging GSM+ paging GPRS additional signalling effort will be produced in
the network
ETSI introduced Routing Areas (RA), which are smaller than LA.
The signalling effort for paging is now more focused to a smaller area.
Since not all cells of a LA are involved in the paging process, the
signalling load for the cells is reduced
Section 1 Module 1 Page 236
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 236
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
Routing Area (RA)
A Routing Area is a sub-set of one LA and identifies one or several cells in
a location area.
The location of a MS in STANDBY state is known in the SGSN on a RA
level.
Each cell in a network is now (additionally to CI and LAC)
characterized by:
Routing Area Code (RA_code) range 0255
RA_Colour range 07
In SI3, if RA COLOUR = -1 : no gprs in the cell
Allows the mobile to quickly check if change of RA : ra colour change (because SI3 update frequent)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 237
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 237
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
Routing Area (RA)
RA information is sent to MS on BCCH by
RA_Colour (SI 3 and 4)
RA_Code (SI 13, less often )
RA_Colour indicates the MS:
if GPRS is supported in the cell (if -1)
the fast identification of the RA membership of the serving cell and
neighbour cells (what cell belongs to what RA)
As a consequence, the assignment of the cells belonging to RA has to
be done carefully, to avoid additional signaling load on the cell
(additional to the signaling for the CS traffic too)
Mapping of BCCH data in 3GPP 45.002 (6.3.1.3)
SI3 : twice in 1.9s
SI4 : twice in 1.9s
SI 13 : once in 1.9s
Section 1 Module 1 Page 238
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 238
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
LA planning
in accordance to the common rules for CS planning, no extra adaptation
(e.g. on the neighbour list) has to be made for PS services
RA planning
follows in general the rules of the common LA assignment, e.g. avoid
roads with fast moving traffic through RA
The RA planning consists of:
assignment of each cell to a RA
assignment of the RA_Code to each RA
assignment of a RA_Colour to each RA
Routing area code can be, ie, LAC+0,1,2,3...
Routing area color : shouldn't be the same between two areas that are next to each other
Section 1 Module 1 Page 239
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 239
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
The following rules are mandatory:
256 possible RA_Code (0..255)
8 possible RA_Colour_Code (0..7)
one RA must belong to only one LA, it is not possible to define a RA
across a LA border (e.g. 1 cell from LA1 and 2 cells from LA2)
a RA can contain one or several cells
one cell can not belong to two RA
cells from one BTS can be allocated to different RA
the maximum number of RA in a LA is 256
it is possible to reuse the RA_Colour in a LA
two adjacent RA in a LA must have different RA_Colour
Section 1 Module 1 Page 240
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 240
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
For the dimensioning of the number of RA in a LA, of the number of
cells belonging to a RA and the number of RA_Codes per LA, the
following steps are proposed, function of different network growths
Step 1: Network with low GPRS/E-GPRS traffic
RA as big as LA =>1 RA_Code (same for each cell) per LA, 1 RA_colour
(same for each cell) per LA
The first introduction step is based on the assumption, that in the
beginning not much PS services is expected. The expense of this
implementation is low
Section 1 Module 1 Page 241
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 241
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
Step 2: Network with medium GPRS/E-GPRS traffic
The LA is split into maximum 8 RA
For each RA in a LA one unique RA_Code is assigned
A balanced number of cells per RA needs to be acquired, however for
identified hot spots an unbalanced assignment is possible (smaller RA for
hot spots)
This step represents a reasonable split of the LA into RA if packet data
traffic rises
It can also be carried out right from the start to be prepared for the
traffic growth
The planning effort is medium
Section 1 Module 1 Page 242
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 242
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
Step 2: Network with medium GPRS/E-GPRS traffic
The LA is split into maximum 8 RA
RA 1 RA 2
RA 6 RA 5 RA 4
RA 3
RA 7 RA 8
RA_C: 0 RA_C: 1 RA_C: 2
RA_C: 3 RA_C: 4 RA_C: 5
RA_C: 6 RA_C: 7
Section 1 Module 1 Page 243
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 243
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
Step 3: Network with high packet data traffic or dense network
LA = up to n RA (max 256)
If the number of RA in a LA is larger than 9, the RA_Colour reuse is
necessary, and a large-scale careful planning is recommended
As described before, frequent RA change by cell-reselection is not
desired =>thus the RA should be not to small
by reusing the RA_Colour, adjacencies of RA's with the same RA_Colour
have to be avoided
Section 1 Module 1 Page 244
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 244
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.9 LA and RA planning [cont.]
Step 3: Network with high packet data traffic or dense network
LA = up to n RA (max 256)
RA 1 RA 2
RA 6 RA 5 RA 4
RA 3
RA 7 RA 8
RA_C: 0 RA_C: 1 RA_C: 2
RA_C: 3 RA_C: 4 RA_C: 5
RA_C: 6 RA_C: 7
RA 9
RA 10 RA 11 RA 12
RA_C: 0
RA_C: 1 RA_C: 2 RA_C: 3
Section 1 Module 1 Page 245
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 245
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.10 Quality of Service
GPRS QoS is not an isolated
topic
It is necessary to use GSM
counters in order to
complete the analysis of :
GPRS QoS
the impact of GPRS on GSM
QoS
Note: for more information
refer to the GPRS QoS follow
up expert training
GSM QoS
Impact of GSM on GPRS
GPRS QoS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 246
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 246
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.10 Quality of Service [cont.]
Use GSM indicators in order to complete the analysis of GPRS QoS
Example :
high number of TBF establishment failures due to radio problems =>
check with GSM counters if there are interferences (quality HO,
interference HO)
Use GSM counters in order to complete the analysis of the impact of
GPRS traffic on GSM QoS
Example :
CCCH load due to GSM and GPRS
TCH Erlang
TCH Congestion (call establishment and incoming HO)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 247
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 247
6 (E)GPRS Network design
6.10 Quality of Service [cont.]
OMC-R indicator comparison
According to GSM, QoS indicators for the Air interface available for GPRS
Indicators based on counters, computed by the MFS, transferred to the
OMC-R
Note: To obtain the QoS for GPRS, it is not sufficient to study only the GPRS
indicators. There is always an influence of GSM service on GPRS service, e.g.
TCH congestion in GSM could be influenced by high CS traffic or the additional
high packed data traffic.
GSM GPRS
Radio interface indi-
cator
Call setup success
rate
TBF establishment success
rate
Call success rate TBF normal release rate
Call drop rate Abnormal TBF release

Section 1 Module 1 Page 248
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 248
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS target
Section 1 Module 1 Page 249
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 249
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.1 General
GSM QoS and Interference problems if existing shall be fixed, e.g. by
Introduction of Frequency Hopping
GSM Power Control (UL)
If the GPRS QoS is still not reached, then
New GPRS features as mentioned in next slides shall be introduced
Section 1 Module 1 Page 250
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 250
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.1 Optimization campaign on parameters
If still the GPRS QoS requirement is not fulfilled, then an
optimization campaign on parameters has to be started
Use of unique values of (GPRS) parameter settings has to be checked
Use of latest Alcatel default parameters
Optimize parameters for the different GPRS features, if implemented in
the network
TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) from hardware point of view can be
considered to increase UL throughput, see also GPRS power control
topic
Section 1 Module 1 Page 251
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 251
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.2 MPDCH
MPDCH and SPDCH Planning
The enabling of MPDCH and the decision to allocate them dynamic or
static is depending on
Traffic capacity the operator has for GSM and GPRS
Traffic capacity the operator can reserve directly to GPRS
Amount of traffic for GSM (Voice, SMS signaling, Location Area Update signaling)
and GPRS (data, signaling, Routing Area Update signaling)
Subscriber distribution per service and area
Mobility (cell reselection) of users during GPRS transfer
Section 1 Module 1 Page 252
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 252
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.2 MPDCH [cont.]
Planning Recommendation on MPDCH
Till the penetration rate of GPRS MS, which support master channel feature,
is unclear the MPDCH should be not enabled
So it is guaranteed that all GPRS mobiles in the network can access for GPRS
service. MS, which do not support MPDCH, cannot access the GPRS service if
MPDCH is enabled. Note: MPDCH can be enabled in network mode of operation:
NMO I and NMO III.

NO MPDCH
Low priority for GPRS or
low GPRS traffic?
Static MPDCH
(Dynamic MPDCH)
YES
GPRS signaling
congestion
Enable secondary MPDCHs depending on
GPRS signaling need
NO
NO YES
Section 1 Module 1 Page 253
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 253
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.2 MPDCH [cont.]
Traffic dependent recommendation (with respect to condition for
MPDCH):
Low GPRS traffic
If GPRS traffic is low no Primary Master Channel needs to be activated
High GPRS traffic
Static Primary Master channel
If the available TS are not scarce
Operator wants the GPRS MS to perform autonomous cell re-selection based on C31 and
C32 criterion
Dynamic Primary Master Channel
If the CS signaling channels CCCH getting overloaded due to high GPRS traffic and
signaling in addition to CS signaling
Section 1 Module 1 Page 254
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 254
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.3 Enhanced PDCH Adaptation & Fast pre-emption
Feature Smooth/Enhanced PDCH Adaptation is recommended to
be enabled, leads to higher GPRS QoS [B7]
There are no parameter to control this feature in B9.
Soft Pre-emption
T1 reallocation of TBF's whose PACCH is supported by a preempted time
slot
T1 reallocation of TBF's whose MEGCH link becomes too small (basic
nibbles are allocated to the CS calls)
Fast pre-emption
After T_PDCH_Pre-emption = 4s
Soft pre-empted PDCH's are released
Other "locked" PDCH's are released
!!! New in B9 !!!
Locked PDCH = PDCH's that are required by the BSC to the MFS for CS calls
Section 1 Module 1 Page 255
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 255
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.4 User multiplexing
The strategy of the TBF resource sharing is to use the PDCH resources
in a most effective way, that means not to waste a PDCH just with
one user and therefore to limit the available PS capacity. On the
other hand, the more users (different TBFs) share a PDCH, the less
effective the data flow and the longer the download or upload time is
Trade-off between radio resource capacity sharing and optimum data
throughput
Since GSM speech service users are still to be preferred, it is
recommended to set N_MAX_UL/DL_TBF_PDCH 1 (e.g.=2)
E.g. if N_MAX_DL_TBF_PDCH and CS-2 is used, the DL bit rate per MS will be
6.0 kbit/s (=12/2) per used timeslot for this MS
If operators goal is to maximize the PS throughput then
N_MAX_UL/DL_TBF_PDCH = 1 (default value) is recommended
Section 1 Module 1 Page 256
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 256
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.5 PDCH Resource Multiplexing
Multislot access is the allocation of more than one PDCH to one MS
(multislot access). However to prevent one multislot MS to use too
many PDCHs each time it wants to transmit data (detriment of other
users), following parameter is used:
MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF : Maximum number of PDCHs, which can be
allocated to a single TBF (or MS)
Range: [1..5], default value: 5 (todays MS capabilities)
Radio Network Planning Impacts
A few multi slot mobiles can occupy all resources with the default value of
MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF. Thus the parameter has to be set, depending from the
expected load and in combination with N_TBF_PER_S/MPDCH to reflect
operators strategy on GPRS QoS.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 257
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 257
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.6 Radio (TBF) Resource Reallocation
With the feature TBF reallocation, the radio resources allocated to a
TBF can be changed during TBF lifetime, which increases successful
and efficient TS allocation (according to multislot capability) during
ongoing data transfer for PS case.
Radio Network Planning Impacts
EN_RES_REALLOCATION is enabling / disabling the Radio Resource
reallocation feature per trigger and per BSS
All event triggers for TBF resource reallocation shall be considered:
Trigger T1
Trigger T2
Trigger T3
Trigger T4 (new in B8 for EGPRS purposes)
!!! B9 : this feature is always activated !!!
Not changeable !
Trigger T1 (target maintain a TBF alive when its PACCH is fast preempted):
Reallocate all impacted TBFs using the pre-empted PDCHs instead of releasing them using the
Packet TBF Release procedure
Trigger T2 (target attempt offering more PDCHs to an MS upon concurrent TBF establishment):
get rid of the concurrence constraints imposed by the multislot class of the MS and an existing TBF
to offer the best throughput, the initial TBF can be moved to other PDCHs
Trigger T3 (target periodically attempt offering more PDCHs to an MS which has a TBF in the
direction of the bias with less PDCHs than it can support according to its multislot class):
take benefit of PDCH resource usage variations in a cell to reallocate the resources granted to a
Mobile Station, in case those resources were not using the full multislot class capabilities of the MS
to offer the best throughput in the direction of the bias and even adapt to bias changes in the
course of a packet transfer
Parameters for trigger T3 :
- T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC: Timer value controlling the time duration between successive
resource reallocation attempts for candidate MSs with the trigger T3
Section 1 Module 1 Page 258
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 258
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.6 Radio (TBF) Resource Reallocation [cont.]
Advantages
The advantage of the feature TBF resource reallocation is to serve a
better PDCH allocation to a TBF (throughput can be optimized),
according to the available radio, transmission, DSP and CPU resources,
during establishment and lifetime of TBF
Drawback
The allocation process is based on the number of PDCHs that the TBF can
be mapped on a new resource and not on the throughput the TBF will get
on these PDCHs
Consequence: in certain cases, available PDCHs will not be used for TBF
reallocation, whilst using them would have improved the TBF throughput
Section 1 Module 1 Page 259
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 259
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.7 Coding Scheme Adaptation
Different quality threshold are introduced since B7 to optimize
coding scheme adaptation algorithm
Radio Network Planning Impacts
Recommendation: Enable Coding scheme adaptation mechanism in GPRS
RLC acknowledged, un-acknowledged mode with parameters
EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK/EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
Default parameter setting = enable.
If the network interference is low it allows to start CS-2 usage at the
beginning of a TBF:
TBF_UL/DL_INIT_CS = CS-2 (default setting = CS-2)
TBF_UL/DL_INIT_MCS = MCS-6 (default setting = MCS-3)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 260
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 260
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8 Cell Reselection
Network control order (NC) parameter defines cell reselection mode,
GMM state and the presence of PBCCH in the serving cell.
Independent from the presence of the MPDCH:
GPRS cell adjacencies are same in packet idle mode as in packet transfer
mode
GPRS cell adjacencies are set equal to the GSM cell adjacencies (i.e. the
BA(GPRS) list = BA(BCCH) list )
C1, C2 MS autonomous cell
reselection (NC0 mode)
Standby
C1, C2 Network controlled
reselection (NC2 mode)
Ready
(or RMM Mode = PTM)
NC2
Not supported in B8 NC1
C1, C2 C1, C31, C32 MS autonomous cell
reselection (NC0 mode)
Ready
C1, C2 C1, C31, C32 MS autonomous cell
reselection (NC0 mode)
Standby
NC0
Absence of the PBCCH Presence of
the PBCCH
Mode of cell reselection MS GMM State Network Control
Order parameter
Section 1 Module 1 Page 261
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 261
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8 Cell Reselection [cont.]
Radio Network Planning Impacts
Possible to reselect a cell without GPRS service (if in the target cell GPRS
is disabled)
Recommendation : enable the GPRS service on all cells in order to
prevent a MS to reselect a cell without GPRS support
"NC0" Cell reselection criterion for PBCCH established or not
MS triggers GPRS reselection according to GSM reselection criteria (C1,
C2)
Radio Network Planning Impacts
Generally optimized GSM/CS parameters for cell reselection shall be kept also
for PS cell reselection
Default values for the parameters are kept
Section 1 Module 1 Page 262
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 262
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8 GPRS Power Control
Compatibility of GSM and GPRS UL Power control
For GPRS rollouts it is recommended to disable the GPRS UL PC by
setting: =0 and
TNX
=0
The reasons why GPRS UL PC shall be disabled:
MS controlled open loop PC is not working reliably (MS software
implementation)
Field tests show a better throughput performance since the acknowledge
message is sent in UL with full power
Remark: It is possible to deactivate GPRS UL power control (GCH=0 and a=0)
and to let GSM UL power control activated (EN_MS_PC=enabled, default),
different power control parameters for GSM and GPRS
Increase UL GPRS throughput
If TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) is used and UL GPRS PC is disabled on
a site than better throughput in UL is expected
Section 1 Module 1 Page 263
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 263
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8 Features on DL TBF establishment and release
3 different features are presented which preemptively delay the TBF
release to speed up the setup of subsequent TBF
Delayed DL TBF release
Fast DL TBF re-establishment
Non DRX Mode
Their success depends on the users download behavior e.g. how
often pages are changed and the content of the downloaded http
looks like. For Web browsing and WAP applications where the PS
traffic is bursty, the gain of the features to delay TBF release will be
very high
The 3 features are complementary and can be activated
independently from each other. Delays to start download of new LLC
PDU depending on feature
Section 1 Module 1 Page 264
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 264
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8.1 Delayed DL TBF release
This feature should be enabled if there is no lack of resources to
achieve higher user application throughput
Main beneficiaries will be the applications consecutive pings, WAP and
HTTP (clustered web page). The round trip time (RTT) can be shortened
by the availability of an already opened TBF. This, in turn, is affected by
the TBF hold time and the time between pings
So in fact less signaling is needed for e.g. download of successive WAP
pages or HTTP links because there is no need to establish a new TBF
during T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL time
T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL should be in between of 1.5s up to 2s depending
on available resources in the cell. The higher the TS capacity in a cell is
the higher the value of T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL can be tuned
DL TBF
T3192
Non-DRX mode
DRX_TIMER_MAX
DL TBF establishment
via PCH or PPCH
of MS paging group
DL TBF
T3192
Non-DRX mode
DRX_TIMER_MAX
DL TBF establishment
via PCH or PPCH
of MS paging group
T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
p.82
During the delayed release of the DL TBF, the BSS periodically sends to the MS a DL RLC data block (with a
polling request) containing a Dummy UI Command which is a LLC PDU whose checksum is deliberately
wrong. This LLC PDU is hence discarded by the LLC layer of the MS.
Sending periodically Dummy UI Commands enables the mobile station to request an UL TBF establishment in
a PACKET DL Ack/Nack message if it has data to send, and prevents defense RLC timers from expiring in the
mobile station.
If new DL LLC PDUs are received for that MS, the DL LLC PDUs can be sent immediately on the DL TBF. If
the BSS does not receive any DL LLC PDU during the inactivity period, it releases the DL TBF through the
normal TBF release procedure.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 265
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 265
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8.1 Delayed DL TBF release [cont.]
Delayed Downlink TBF release -> Total TBF release time is:
T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL_RADIO +
T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME.
= 800 ms + 700 ms (defaults) = 1500 ms if delayed DL TBF Release is enabled by
parameter EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL
Advantage
no delay to start DL data transfer for new DL LLC PDUs
less signaling
throughput improved for reason: long RTT. RTT can be shortened by the
availability of an already opened TBF. This, in turn, is affect by the TBF
hold time, and the time between pings.
Drawback
waste of resources, TBF is kept open during delayed downlink time,
available USF values are limited
T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel = T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME (= 1600ms)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 266
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 266
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8.2 Fast Downlink TBF re-establishment process
Fast Downlink TBF re-establishment process
After reception of the final block by the MS and after the sending of the
last PACKET DL ACK/NACK message, the MS still listens on the PACCH
during T3192 sec
BSS re-establishes a DL TBF on the PACCH of the previous DL TBF (i.e. to
send a PACKET DL ASSIGNMENT message on the PACCH)
fast DL TBF re-establishment without impacting the (P)CCCH resources;
i.e. a new TBF is established but with the parameters of the old TBF
(TFI, TAI)
Rules
T3192 > MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (120 ms)
T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec
Default Values
T3192 = 1000ms when non-DRX mode is not activated
T3192 = 500ms when non-DRX mode is active
Relative Reserved Block Period : waiting time before UL emission (=> for PACCH) is allowed (cf. USF
mechanism)
RRBP : +3RB, +4RB, +5RB or +6RB (approx)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 267
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 267
7 Considerable features to reach (E)GPRS QoS target
7.8.3 Non-DRX feature
Non-DRX feature benefits
Continuous monitoring of AGCH messages by the MS
The MFS establishes a DL TBF on the first available AGCH block (without
MPDCH) or the first PPCH occurrence (with MPDCH)
Higher downlink throughput and shorter transfer delay for cell
reselection and bursty download application (HTTP, WAP).
Radio Network Planning Impacts
DRX_TIMER_MAX = 2s (Max = 4s) Non-DRX mode possible for 2 seconds
If Non-DRX feature possible, influence on following parameters settings:
BS_AG_BLKS_RES, BS_PA_MFRMS, T_PDA, T_PUA, T_GPRS_assign_AGCH
T_GPRS_assign_AGCH parameter can be found in the memo
MND/TD/SYT/EBR/0342.2001.
In B7, the default value was set to 0.7 s
The discontinuous (DRX) mode applies when the MS is in packet idle mode. This function allows a MS not to
monitor all PCCCH blocks, but only blocks defined by its paging group. The MS applies existing GSM DRX
procedures if there is no MPDCH.
Remove 0.6 seconds, due to AGCH queuing time. So real time in non-DRX is 1.4s.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 268
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 268
8 GPRS introduction into operational GSM network
Section 1 Module 1 Page 269
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 269
8 introduction into operational GSM network
8.1 General
Following aspects are considered if GPRS is introduced into a mature
GSM network without network design changes
Different to the approach of GPRS Greenfield planning
If the operator foresees design changes due to GPRS QoS requirements
than traffic analysis and GPRS network design tasks has to be done
before the GPRS introduction step
Actual status of the GSM network
GSM QoS and Interference
All GSM network enhancement features and GSM network problems, mainly
GSM QoS and interference, shall be fixed before GPRS is implemented
New network design/frequency planning
If a new network design and frequency planning is developed to improve GSM
QoS and interference, then the implementation of this design should be done
before GPRS is implemented
Section 1 Module 1 Page 270
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 270
8 introduction into operational GSM network
8.1 General [cont.]

GSM QoS and Interference
problems?
Actual GSM capacity enough to
cope with GSM and GPRS traffic?
New Frequency plan foreseen?
RA planning
CAE data generation
yes
yes
no
no
yes
GSM problem fixing
no
Introduction of GPRS and
related features/settings.
Check GPRS throughput map
G
P
R
S

I
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

H
o
w

t
o

r
e
a
c
h

G
P
R
S

Q
o
S
?

T
a
s
k
s

b
e
f
o
r
e

G
P
R
S

I
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

Increase capacity
GPRS QoS reached?
Considerable features to reach
GPRS QoS target
Optimize GPRS parameters if
needed
Add new GPRS features if needed
GSM QoS and Interference
problems
Implement Frequency
Plan
yes
no
no
Section 1 Module 1 Page 271
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 271
8 introduction into operational GSM network
8.1 General [cont.]
Occurred traffic and handled traffic balance
GPRS QoS requirements
Operator requirements define the needed GPRS capacity and GPRS QoS
per user in relation to specific definitions for user and used service:
Volume @BH (Kbytes)
Page size (Kbytes)
Queue delay (seconds)
Quantile (%)
Bit rate (kbit/s)
Expected GPRS traffic
The calculation of expected GPRS traffic has to be done before
Following results will be then available:
TS needed for CS traffic and signaling in DL/UL and
TS needed for PS traffic and signaling in DL/UL
Section 1 Module 1 Page 272
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 272
8 introduction into operational GSM network
8.1 General [cont.]
Amount of TS, TRX's & frequencies needed :
If resources are enough for GSM and GPRS
TRX assignment to GPRS service and the PDCH planning can be done.
If resources are not enough for GSM and GPRS
Additional TRX & frequencies must be allocated to the sites with not enough
traffic capacity.
A new frequency planning should be done when a not negligible amount of new
frequencies have to be added to a planning area to fulfill (GSM+GPRS) capacity
requirements.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 273
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 273
8 introduction into operational GSM network
8.1 General [cont.]
Introduction of GPRS and related features/settings
The prerequisites for a GPRS analysis are following tasks
Field strength prediction
Interference analysis
If new sites after GPRS analysis are required to fulfill operators GPRS
requirements, a new frequency planning with a certain frequency band
range planning has to be done.
Routing area, CAE data
The routing area (RA) planning is a must for GPRS introduction into GSM
network, see chapter 7 for details on RA planning and CAE data
generation.
Section 1 Module 1 Page 274
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 274
8 introduction into operational GSM network
8.1 General [cont.]
GPRS QoS increasing tasks to be done are depending on dimensions
of QoS requirements. What kind of tasks and references can be done
to increase GPRS QoS ? As seen earlier :
Dedicated TRX for GPRS in a cell can be done if TRX number in the cell is
2
Introduction of GPRS Master channels (MPDCH to separate GPRS and GSM
signaling
Open question: Penetration rate of GPRS MS which can decode MPDCH
The parameters for PDCH dynamic allocation (and TBF resource
management) depends on GPRS QoS requirements :
Weaker GPRS requirements more TS for GSM can be reserved with a low
value of MAX_PDCH
For GSM tasks see next slides
Section 1 Module 1 Page 275
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 275
9 GSM Network enhancement features & GPRS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 276
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 276
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.1 Frequency Hopping
The dependency between FH usage and Coding scheme distribution
and the consequences on CS1-CS3 and CS 4
Generally Frequency Hopping (FH) leads to Interference averaging. Thus
calls having good quality will get worse, bad calls will get better. This is
valid for GSM, similar it is valid for GPRS.
CS1 is used in bad conditions, thus it will be improved if FH is
introduced.
CS4 is used in very good conditions, which are more seldom in a hopping
network. Thus CS4 will perform less good and will be used more seldom.
The overall gain of CS1 - CS3 will depend on the C/I situation before and
after FH.
CS adaptation parameters can be tuned more optimistic in respect to
throughput and Coding Scheme if FH is used:
CS_QUAL_XX_1_2_FH_Z > CS_QUAL_XX_1_2_NFH_Z
Section 1 Module 1 Page 277
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 277
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.1 Frequency Hopping [cont.]
GPRS load and GPRS performance
GSM + GPRS load increases Higher probability for interference
Because GPRS performance is mainly based on C/I it will reduce the
performance.
Radio Network Planning Impacts
To reduce the load in the network/cell following GSM activities can be
started:
Adding more resources, frequencies
Make smaller cell sizes (e.g. achieved by stronger tilt)
Do proper cell planning
Section 1 Module 1 Page 278
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 278
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.2 -cell
The main advantage of a -cell environment may be a better
frequency re-use possibility, thus better C/I value and higher
throughput can be expected (especially for E-GPRS with higher C/I
requirements than GPRS s). Following two steps is proposed for GPRS
implementation
1. Step: GPRS traffic is low => introduction of GPRS for macro
and -cell together
Disadvantages in both layers :
Emergency capacity on macro cell layer reduced
Higher blocking probability on -cell layer for CS traffic
Solution:
Reduction of the maximum GPRS capacity of the -cell to 30-50% by
parameters setting
Tuning of the GPRS user access handling (TBF and PDCH share)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 279
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 279
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.2 -cell [cont.]
Step 2: Increasing GPRS traffic => network densification
Measures:
Hardware : TRX upgrade, -cell and macro cell densification, site
design
Parameter: GPRS capacity and user access handling tuning
Basis: OMC-R Load measurements and GPRS customer behavior (location)
Assumption: 80% of packet data traffic is static, 20% is dynamic (driving)
The strategy is also valid for a different assumption, but this assumption is
more probable.
!!! Activate Outgoing Redirection from MICRO !!!
EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(Umbrella) = Enable
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR(Micro) = -47 dBm
NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE(Umbrella) = at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer
Section 1 Module 1 Page 280
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 280
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.3 Dual Band
The consequence for the PDCH configuration will be explained
related to Alcatels dual band approaches.
Reminder:
there are no HO in GPRS for PS services
supported MS classes to be checked
Two Approaches
Multiband BSS approach
Multiband cell approach
Section 1 Module 1 Page 281
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 281
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.3 Dual Band [cont.]
Multiband BSS approach
A dedicated BCCH for each cell/frequency band
Class B and C MSs can make interband cell reselection during data
transmission
if C2 parameters are used in order to give a higher priority to a given layer for
circuit mode
the same priority is obtained for packet mode
thus GPRS can not be kept in 900 MHz layer, if GSM MS is sent to 1800 MHz
layer
therefore PS functionality should be configured in both bands
Section 1 Module 1 Page 282
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 282
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.3 Dual Band [cont.]
Multiband cell approach
TRXs of one band are allocated to the outer zone and the TRXs of the
other band to the inner zone.
The BCCH is configured to the outer zone. The principle is similar to the
concentric cell ones.
During PS traffic, class B and C MSs will always be served by the outer
zone GPRS TRX.
if C2 parameters are used in order to give a higher priority to a given layer for
circuit mode the same priority is obtained for packet mode
if GSM MS is sent to inner zone in dedicated mode, the GPRS service cannot be
ensured in the inner zone
PS functionality in outer zone only
No use of C2 to give a higher priority to non-GPRS layer
Section 1 Module 1 Page 283
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 283
9 GSM network enhancement features & GPRS
9.4 Concentric cell
For the two possible cases:
Concentric cells which are disturbing other cells:
the inner zone is smaller than the outer zone and keeps the disturbing
carriers
concentric cells which are disturbed by other cells:
the inner zone and outer zone carriers have the same output powers;
nevertheless, the size of the inner zone is dimensioned by proper
parameter setting
the same recommendation holds: the TRX for PS traffic must be
configured in the outer zone of the concentric cell
Section 1 Module 1 Page 284
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 284
10 E-GPRS
Section 1 Module 1 Page 285
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 285
10 E-GPRS
10.1 E-GPRS main differences
E-GPRS main differences
TRX output power
RX sensitivity
EDGE timeslot GSM900 GSM1800
8PSK TX power 15 W or 41.76 dBm
(tolerance 0.5 + 0.5 dB)
12 W or 40.8 dBm
(tolerance -0.5 + 0.5 dB)
Reference sensitivity -112 dBm (static MCS-1)
108 dBm (TU50 ideal FH, MCS1)
-104 dBm (static MCS-5)
- 100 dBm (TU50 ideal FH, MCS5)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 286
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 286
10 E-GPRS
10.1 E-GPRS main differences [cont.]
-110 -105 -100 -95 -90 -85
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
MCS-9
MCS-8
MCS-7
MCS-6
MCS-5
MCS-4
MCS-3
MCS-2
MCS-1
Level [dBm]
T
h
r
o
u
g
h
p
u
t


[
k
b
p
s
]


Section 1 Module 1 Page 287
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 287
10 E-GPRS
10.1 E-GPRS main differences [cont.]
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
MCS-9
MCS-8
MCS-7
MCS-6
MCS-5
MCS-4
MCS-3
MCS-2
MCS-1
T
h
r
o
u
g
h
p
u
t


[
k
b
p
s
]


C/Ico(dB)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 288
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 288
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
Section 1 Module 1 Page 289
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 289
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.1 Customer questionnaire (Example) [cont.]
1. Total amount of GSM subscribers in the network (CS+PS subscribers)
1Mio
2. Blocking at air interface (speech)
2%
3. Speech traffic per subscriber (mErl/sub)
20 mErl/Sub rural,
25 mErl/Sub urban
4. Distribution of CS subscribers to different morpho classes
80% urban
20% rural)
5. Percentage of GPRS subscribers
7% of total GSM subscribers
6. Busy hour occurrence for speech traffic and packet data traffic:
Speech traffic busy hour: 8-11, 13-17 and 18-22 oclock
Packet data service hours: Business: 8-11 and 14-17, private 14-20 oclock
7. and 8. see table
Section 1 Module 1 Page 290
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 290
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.1 Customer questionnaire (Example) [cont.]
9. PS user behaviour/distribution:
daily GPRS user profile activity (days/month):
business 22 days,
private 30 days
GPRS user profiles percentage (%), related to the total GPRS
subscriber number = 7%: 2% private and 5 % business
Geographical percentage distribution (%) of GPRS user profiles related to
morphostructure:
urban = 70% business, 50% private
rural = 30% business, 50% private
10. Number of BTS in the existing network
2000 BTSs
11. Distribution of existing BTS to morphoclasses:
1200 BTSs in urban,
800 in rural
12. Number of TRX/BTS, in accordance to morphoclass:
3*2 configuration in urban, 3*1 configuration in rural
Section 1 Module 1 Page 291
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 291
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.2 User and area distribution determination
According the questionnaire, the GPRS user distribution will be
calculated
Due to the different network capacity in urban and rural area and
the different ratio of business and private users in the area, the
GPRS and speech subscriber are split to urban and rural area
Total GSM subscriber: 1 Mio
Business Private
GPRS share 7% total 5% (50000 subs.) 2% (20000 subs.)
Urban area 70% (35000) 50% (10000)
Rural area 30% (15000) 50% (10000)
Total CS subscriber: 1 Mio
Urban area 80% (800000 subs.)
Rural area 20% (200000 subs)

Packet data
Speech
Section 1 Module 1 Page 292
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 292
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.3 Traffic demand for CS traffic
The traffic demand for CS subscribers
2% blocking during the busy hour
Urban area 25 mErlang/Subs.
Rural area 20 mErlang/Subs.
Assumption: Homogeneous traffic distribution in each morpho class
Total CS subscriber: 1 Mio
Urban area Rural area
Traffic [Erlang] 20000 4000

Section 1 Module 1 Page 293
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 293
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic
The traffic demand for PS is calculated in two steps:
First step: throughput demand per user profile calculation (due to the
different user behaviours)
Second step: Relation of throughput demand to the total subscriber
amount in urban and rural area
Assumptions:
packet data traffic per month is user profile depending (e.g. not during the
whole month, like speech traffic)
PS traffic is not to be spread over the whole day, there are now service
hours/day, depending on the user profile
Packet data traffic occurs only during the service hours.
Packet data traffic is homogeneously distributed over the service hours,
During service hours, the user is continuously active (worst case calculation)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 294
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 294
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic [cont.]
What is the busy hour?
1. CS traffic is maximum
2. PS traffic is also maximum in that period
Exception:
CS and PS busy hour not overlapping -> separate dimensioning
Reserve still sufficient capacity for CS during PS busy hour!
PS user profile service hours not overlapping
Use user profile with highest throughput demand
Section 1 Module 1 Page 295
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 295
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic [cont.]
In our example, the service hours for PS traffic are in total 6 hours,
but from 14 to17 oclock business and private subscriber will make
data traffic at the same time
Thus the busy hours for data traffic are these 3 hours
It is also visible, that during that time, also for speech traffic a busy
time occurs
Busy hour: GPRS traffic dimensioning will be 14 to17
Speech
Packet
Business
Private
8 11 1314 17 20 22
Section 1 Module 1 Page 296
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 296
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.4 Traffic demand for packet traffic [cont.]
Packet data throughput demand (user profile):
Packet data throughput demand (total network):
Business Private
Traffic/month [Mbyte] 8.124 2.380
Traffic/month [kbit] 68149.05=
8.124*1024*1024*8/1000
=19964.88
traffic volume demand /day
[kbit]
3097.68
=68149.05/22 days
665.49
for 30 days
throughput demand /service
hours [kbit/s]
0.14
=3097.68/(6 hrs*3600)
0.03
6 serv. hours
throughput demand /busy hours
[kbit/s]
0.14
during 3 busy hours
0.03
during 3 busy hrs

Urban area Rural area
Business Private Business Private
throughput demand
/busy hours [kbit/s]
4900 300 2100 300
Total: 5200 2400

Section 1 Module 1 Page 297
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 297
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.5 Network capacity calculation
For CS traffic:
The actual network capacity is sufficient to handle the CS traffic during
the busy hour by assuming a maximal blocking probability of 2%
Total BTS 2000
Urban area Rural area
BTS 1200 800
Configuration 3x2 3x1
Capacity/Erlang 2%
Blocking
29520
=1200*3*8.2
6960
=800*3*2.9
CS traffic demand 20000 4000

Section 1 Module 1 Page 298
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 298
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.5 Network capacity calculation [cont.]
Network throughput capacity for PS traffic:
The network throughput capacity for PS traffic is based on the cell
throughput capacity
For this dimensioning example it is appropriate to consider the result of
the cell ranges dimensioning example
According to it, 59% of the cell area is operated in CS-2 and 41% in CS-1
mode
The cell throughput capacity can be estimated with a data rate of
(0.41*8+0.59*12) kbit/s = 10.36 kbit/s per timeslot
Section 1 Module 1 Page 299
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 299
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.5 Network capacity calculation [cont.]
The network capacity is depending from the allocated TS for PDCH
use:
parameter MAX_PDCH in cell's CS normal load situation
parameter MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD in cell's CS high load
parameter MIN_PDCH (optional)
Example:
MAX_PDCH is set to 8 TS for the 3x2 BTS configuration (2
nd
TRX
allocated for GPRS),
MAX_PDCH for the 3x1 BTS, only 7 TS can be allocated for packet data
(TS 0 is reserved for BCCH)
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD =1 (Under CS high load conditions, only one TS
will be present for packet data usage)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 300
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 300
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.5 Network capacity calculation [cont.]
Total BTS 2000
Urban area Rural area
BTS 1200 800
Configuration 3x2 3x1
Total Available TS, BCCH not incl. 54000
=(7+8)*3*1200
16800
=7*3*300
Available TS, BCCH not incl.
MAX_PDCH_GROUP = 8 TS
28800
=8*3*1200
16800
=7*3*800
Available TS if BSC in HIGH_LOAD
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1 TS
3600
=28800/8
2400
=16800/7
Capacity [kbit/s]
(10.36 kbit/s /TS)
298368
=28800*10.36
174048
Capacity [kbit/s]
if BSC in HIGH_LOAD (10.36 kbit/s /TS)
37296
=3600*10.36
24864

Section 1 Module 1 Page 301
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 301
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.6 Traffic dimensioning
Allocating TS to GPRS traffic reduces the capacity within the circuit
switched design
For the busy hour, the BSC is in high load situation, i.e the maximum
of PDCHs is equal to MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (resource control)
The following table gives the CS capacities based on a blocking
probability of 2% (in Erlang), according to the amount of allocated
timeslots for GPRS in BSC high load situation
Amount PDCH A-
mount
of TRX
A-
mount
SDCCH
Amount
TCH
+PDCH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 TRX 1 7 2.93 2.27 1.65 1.09 0.6 0.2 0.02 0
2 TRX 2 14 8.2 7.4 6.61 5.84 5.08 4.34 3.62 2.93
3 TRX 3 21 14.03 13.18 12.33 11.49 10.65 9.82 9.01 8.2
4 TRX 4 28 20.15 19.26 18.38 17.50 16.63 15.76 14.89 14.03
5 TRX 4 36 27.34 26.43 25.52 24.62 23.72 22.82 21.93 21.03
6 TRX 5 43 33.75 32.83 31.91 30.99 30.08 29.16 28.25 27.34
Section 1 Module 1 Page 302
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 302
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]
MAX_PDCH_Group = 8 or 7
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1
Network capacity for CS and PS traffic (1 TS for PS):
Total BTS =2000
Urban area Rural area
number of BTS 1200 800

Configuration 3x2 3x1
Capacity/Erlang @2 % Blocking 29520 6960
Capacity/Erlang @2% Blocking and 1 PDCH 26640
=1200*3*7.4
5448
=800*3*2.27
Speech
CS traffic demand [Erl] 20000 4000
Capacity [kbit/s] (10.36 kbit/s /TS) 298368 174048
Capacity [kbit/s] if BSC in HIGH_LOAD
(10.36 kbit/s /TS)
37296 24864
Packet
data
PD busy hour throughput demand [kbit/s] 5200 2400

Section 1 Module 1 Page 303
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 303
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]
Conclusions:
Network is able to serve CS traffic.
One TS is necessary to handle PS traffic.
One TS is sufficient for PS traffic during the busy hour.
No CS service degradation during busy hour.
The reservation of 1 TS for PS traffic represents no service degradation for CS
traffic, since the remaining network capacity is still sufficient to handle the CS
traffic.
To guarantee a permanent PS service independent form the load situation, the
parameter Min_PDCH_GROUP was set to 1 (I.e. 1 TS/ cell is permanently
reserved for PS service and not available for CS traffic),
however Min_PDCH_GROUP = 0 is recommended (load reduction on Atermux
interface)
Section 1 Module 1 Page 304
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 304
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]
Further iterations would be necessary (increase of
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) if the PS traffic demand could not be
handled with MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1 timeslot
Further, if the CS traffic demand could not be handled with the
remaining timeslots some measures are necessary e.g.:
add a TRX to the considered serving cell
shrink the cell size of the serving cell (e.g. introduce downtilt) and
increase the cell size of a neighbouring cell which offers sufficient
capacity to handle the traffic demand surplus of the serving cell
reduce interference (network changes) to get higher average throughput
Section 1 Module 1 Page 305
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 305
11 GPRS traffic calculation example
11.6 Traffic dimensioning [cont.]
In the Alcatel GPRS implementation step 1, the number of TRX's
which can be allocated to GPRS is maximum N
TRXGPRS
=1.
In our worst case consideration, this TRX comes to its limit when the
packet throughput demand is higher than the throughput capacity
and cannot be satisfied even if the number of allocated TS for PS
reaches Max_PDCH_Group
Section 1 Module 1 Page 306
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 306
Abbreviations and Acronyms
Switch to notes view!
ALMAP: ALcatel MAnagement Platform
APN: Access Point Name
AS: Alpha Server (Compaq)
BG: Border Gateway
BSC: Base Station Controller
BSS: Base Station Subsystem
BSCGP: BSC-GPRS Protocol
BSSGP: BSS-GPRS Protocol
BVCI: BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier
CCBS: Customer Care and Billing Center
CCU: Channel Codec Unit
CDR: Call Detail Record
CG: Charging Gateway
CS: Circuit Switching
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DL: Down Link
DLCI= Data Link Connection Identifier
DNS: Domain Name System
EDGE: Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution
FUMO : Frame Unit Module
FR: Frame Relay
GPRS: General Packet Radio Service
GGSN: Gateway GSN
GMM: GPRS Mobility Management
GR: GPRS Register
GSL: GPRS Signaling Link
GSM: Global System for Mobile communication
GSN: GPRS Support Node
GSS: GPRS Sub-System
GTP: GPRS Tunneling Protocol
HLR: Home Location Register
HSCSD: High Speed Circuit-Switching Data
IMSI: International Mobile Subscriber Identity
IP: Internet Protocol
ISDN : Integrated Service Digital Network
ISP: Internet Service Provider
LAN: Local Area Network
LLC: Logical Link Control
MAC: Medium Access Control
MFS: Multi-Bsc Fast packet Server
MNRG: Mobile Not Reachable for Gprs
MS: Mobile Station
MSC: Mobile Switching Center
MT: Mobile Terminal
NE: Network Element
NMC: Network Management Center
NNM: Network Node Manager
NRPA : Network Requested PDP Context
Activation
NSAPI: Network Service Access Point Identifier
NSC: Network Service Control layer
NSEI: Network Service Entity Identifier
NSS: Network Sub-System
NS-VC: Network Service- Virtual Circuit
NTP: Network Time Protocol
DB : On Demand Bandwidth
OMC: Operation & Maintenance Center
OS: Operation System
PAGCH: Packet- Access Grant Channel
PCCCH: Packet- Common Control Channel
PCO: Protocol
PCU: Packet Control Unit
PDCH: Packet Data CHannel
PDN: Packet Data Network
PDP: Packet Data Protocol (IP or X25)
PDU: Protocol Data Unit
PPCH: Packet- Paging CHannel
PRACH: Packet- Random Access CHannel
PS: Packet Switching
P-TMSI: Packet- Temporary Mobile Subscriber
Identity
PVC: Permanent Virtual Circuit
P-VLR: Packet- Visitors Location Register
QoS: Quality of Service
RA: Routing Area
RIP : Routing Information Protocol
RLC: Radio Link Control
RADIUS: Remote Authentication Dial In Use
Service
RRDTUF : Roaming Restriction Data Towards
Unknown Foreign PLMN
RRM: Radio Resource Management
RSZ : Regional Subscription Zone
SGSN: Serving GSN
SM: Session Management | Short Message
SMS: Short Message Service
SMS-C: SMS-Center
SNDCP: Sub Network-Dependent Convergence
Protocol
SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol
SNS: Sub-Network Service layer
TBF: Temporary Block Flow
TC: Trans Coder
TCH: Traffic CHannel
TCP: Transmission Control Protocol
TDMA: Time-Division Multiplexing Access
TFI: Temporary block Flow Identifier
TID: Tunnel IDentity
TLLI: Temporary Logical Link Identity
TMN: Telecommunication Management Protocol
TS: Time Slot
UDP: User Datagram protocol
UL: Up Link
UMTS: Universal Mobile Transmission System
WAP: Wireless Application Protocol
WAN: Wide Area Network

Section 1 Module 1 Page 307
All Rights Reserved 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
3FL 38020 ACAA Edition 2
Radio Network Planning - GPRS and EGPRS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM BSS - GPRS and EGPRS
Radio Network Planning
1 1 307
End of Module
EVOLIUM BSS GPRS and EGPRS

You might also like